Nokia Solutions and Networks T5AW1 48V 800MHz CDMA BTS User Manual cover in frontmat

Nokia Solutions and Networks 48V 800MHz CDMA BTS cover in frontmat

UserManual.wiki >

Nokia Solutions and Networks >

T5AW1 User Manual HTML Version

Exhibit D users manual

SCt4812T BTS Optimization/ATP

System Software Release 2.9.2

800/1700/1900 MHz

CDMA

English

May 2000

68P64114A36–O

English

May 2000

68P64114A36–O

SCt4812T BTS Optimization/ATP

800/1700/1900 MHz

CDMA

SCt4812T BTS Optimization/ATP

System Software Release 2.9.2

800/1700/1900 MHz

CDMA

English

May 2000

68P64114A36–O

Notice

While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from any

inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has been

carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,

Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to make

changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not

assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey

license under its patent rights or the rights of others.

It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),

programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean

that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.

Copyrights

This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted

Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and

other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,

reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola

material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced,

distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of

Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the

copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Usage and Disclosure Restrictions

License Agreement

The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and may

be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.

Copyrighted Materials

Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or

documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or

computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.

High Risk Activities

Components, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,

manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safe

controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life

Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied

warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.

Trademarks

and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.

Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services profiled

herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.

Printed on

Recyclable Paper

REV010598

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

May 2000 i

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table of Contents

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

CDMA 800/1700/1900 MHz

List of Figures iv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of Tables vi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Product Information x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Foreword xi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Safety xiv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Revision History xvi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Patent Notification xvii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1: Introduction

Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose of the Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Test Equipment 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Documentation 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Equipment Identification 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frame Module Location & Identification 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2: Preliminary Operations

Preliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre–Power–up Tests 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Power–up Tests 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3: Optimization/Calibration

Optimization/Calibration – Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the LMF 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download the BTS 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Set Calibration 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . continued on next page

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

RFDS Setup and Calibration 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Alarms Testing 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – All–inclusive TX & RX 4-1. . . . . . . . .

TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Code Domain Power Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generate an ATP Report 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5: Prepare to Leave the Site

Prepare to Leave the Site 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting

Basic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Download 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A: Data Sheets

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Serial Number Check List A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix

Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations

Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations D-1. . . . . . . . .

. . . continued on next page

Table of Contents – continued

May 2000 iii

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Appendix E: CDMA Operating Frequency Information

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North

American PCS Bands E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean Bands E-6. . . .

Appendix F: PCS Interface Setup for Manual Testing

Test Equipment Setup F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix G: VSWR

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix H: Download ROM Code

Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index Index-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

List of Figures

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

CDMA 800/1700/1900 MHz

Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-2: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-3: –48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-5: –48 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-7: –48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-8: +27 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-9: –48 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-10: SC 4812T C–CCP Shelf 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-11: +27 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration – 4 Carrier

with 2:1 Combiners 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-12: –48 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration – 4 Carrier, 3–Sector

with 2:1 Combiners 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-13: +27 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-28. . . .

Figure 1-14: –48 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-29. . . .

Figure 1-15: –48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf 1-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 1-16: CDMA (COBRA) RFDS Layout 1-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-1: Switch Card 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings – SC 4812T 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-3: +27 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-5: –48 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-6: –48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 2-7: DC Distribution Pre-test (COBRA RFDS Detail) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-1: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-2: LMF Connection Detail 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-3: Typical Logical BTS Configurations 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-4: LMF Folder Structure 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-5: BTS LAN Interconnect Diagram 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . continued on next page

List of Figures – continued

May 2000 v

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 3-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-7: –48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connection 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test Setup 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest) 3-43

Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A W/PCS for 1.7/1.9 GHz 3-44. .

Figure 3-13: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest,

HP 8935 and Advantest) 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-14: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-15: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown

with and without RFDS) 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-16: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown

with or without RFDS) 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-17: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP

Tests (using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-18: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test

(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 3-19: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering 3-81. . . . .

Figure 3-20: AMR Connector Pin Numbering 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5-1: MGLI2/SGLI2 MMI Port Connection 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 5-2: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum

(CDMA Allocation) E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency

Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) E-6. . . . . .

Figure F-1: Calibrating Test Setup Components F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure F-2: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set

(1700/1900 MHz) G-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz) G-4. .

Figure G-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465 G-6. . . . . . . . . . .

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

List of Tables

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

CDMA 800/1700/1900 MHz

Table 1-1: BTS Sector Configuration 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1-2: Sector Configurations 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-2: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame) 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-3: DC Power Pre-test (RFDS) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-4: DC Input Power Cable Guidelines 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-5: Common Power Supply Verification 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-6: Initial Power-up (RFDS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-7: Initial Power–up (BTS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-1: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-2: LMF to BTS Connection 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-3: C–CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers

(Top Shelf) 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-4: C–CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers

(Bottom Shelf) 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-5: CD ROM Installation 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-6: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-7: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection 3-12. . . .

Table 3-8: Pinging the Processors 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-9: BTS Login Procedure 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-10: Logout Procedure 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-11: Download and Enable MGLI2 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-12: Download Code and Data to Non–MGLI Devices 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-13: Select CSM Clock Source 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-14: Enable CSMs 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-15: Enable MCCs 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-16: Enable Redundant GLIs 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-30. . . . . . . . .

Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . continued on next page

List of Tables – continued

May 2000 vii

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/Verification 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-22: Test Equipment Setup 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab 3-50. .

Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-26: Cable Calibration 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-27: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and

Spectrum Analyzer 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and

Spectrum Analyzer 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Value 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-31: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-32: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-33: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-34: BTS TX Path Calibration 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-35: Download BLO 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Audit 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-37: All Cal/Audit Test 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-38: Create CAL File 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration Procedure 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-45: Program the TSU NAM 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 3-46: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box 3-82. . . . . . .

Table 3-47: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box 3-85. . . . .

Table 3-48: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-2: Enabling Devices 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-3: BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-4: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-5: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . continued on next page

List of Tables – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

viii

Table 5-6: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC 5-6. . . . . . .

Table 5-7: LMF Termination and Removal 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 5-8: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-2. . . . . . . .

Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer

Communication Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure 6-8.

Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor

Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s) 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI2s) 6-15. .

Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2 6-15. . . . .

Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-19: No BBX2 Control in the Shelf – No Control over

Co–located GLI2s 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-20: MGLI2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-16. . . . . .

Table 6-21: No MCC24 Channel Elements 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 6-25: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-2: Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-4: Pre–power Checklist A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-5: Pre–power Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-7: LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . continued on next page

List of Tables – continued

May 2000 ix

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table A-8: LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-9: LPA Convergence A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and

4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels) A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-11: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier

Adjacent Channels) A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-12: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or

–Carrier Adjacent Channels) A-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier

Non–adjacent Channels) A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-15: TX Antenna VSWR A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-16: RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix C-4. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table D-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) D-1. . . . . . . . .

Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands) E-7. . .

Table F-1: System Connectivity F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using

the HP PCS Interface) F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table F-3: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing F-7. . . . .

Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-8

Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set G-4. . . . . . . . . . .

Table H-1: Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Product Information

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Model & Options Charts

Refer to the SC 4812T Field Replaceable Units manual (68P64114A08)

for detailed model structure and option information

This document covers only the steps required to verify the functionality

of the Base transceiver Subsystem (BTS) equipment prior to system

level testing, and is intended to supplement site specific application

instructions. It also should be used in conjunction with existing product

manuals. Additional steps may be required.

Foreword

May 2000 xi

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Scope of manual

This manual is intended for use by cellular telephone system

craftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular system

equipment and ancillary devices. It is assumed that the user of this

information has a general understanding of telephony, as used in the

operation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), and is

familiar with these concepts as they are applied in the cellular

mobile/portable radiotelephone environment. The user, however, is not

expected to have any detailed technical knowledge of the internal

operation of the equipment.

This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipment

training offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement or

enhance the knowledge gained through such training.

Text conventions

The following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point out

information that must be read. This information may be set-off from the

surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.

The four categories of these special paragraphs are:

Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that

you can use.

NOTE

Presents information to help you avoid an undesirable

situation or provides additional information to help you

understand a topic or concept.

IMPORTANT

Presents information to identify a situation in which

equipment damage could occur, thus avoiding damage to

equipment.

CAUTION

Presents information to warn you of a potentially

hazardous situation in which there is a possibility of

personal injury.

WARNING

. . . continued on next page

Foreword – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

xii

The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation of

software information:

SIn text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type style

without angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used to

name a command.

SIn text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and the

system output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

SIn command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent those

parts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown and

typewriter style characters represent command output responses

as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.

SIn the command format of the command definition,

style characters represent the command parameters.

SAfter typing a command, press the <Enter> key to initiate the action.

Changes to manual

Changes that occur after the printing date are incorporated into your

manual by Cellular Manual Revisions (CMRs). The information in this

manual is updated, as required, by a CMR when new options and

procedures become available for general use or when engineering

changes occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should be

retained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a list

of all applicable CMRs contained in this manual.

Receiving updates

Technical Education & Documentation (TED) maintains a customer

database that reflects the type and number of manuals ordered or shipped

since the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Also identified

in this database is a “key” individual (such as Documentation

Coordinator or Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updates

from TED as they are released.

To ensure that your facility receives updates to your manuals, it is

important that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date.

Therefore, if you have corrections or wish to make changes to the

information in our database (i.e., to assign a new “key” individual),

please contact Technical Education & Documentation at:

MOTOROLA, INC.

Technical Education & Documentation

1 Nelson C. White Parkway

Mundelein, Illinois 60060

U.S.A.

Phone:

Within U.S.A. and Canada 800-872-8225. . . . .

Outside of U.S.A. and Canada +1-847-435–5700. .

FAX: +1-847-435–5541. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Foreword – continued

May 2000 xiii

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Reporting manual errors

In the event that you locate an error or identify a deficiency in your

manual, please take time to write to us at the address above. Be sure to

include your name and address, the complete manual title and part

number (located on the manual spine, cover, or title page), the page

number (found at the bottom of each page) where the error is located,

and any comments you may have regarding what you have found. We

appreciate any comments from the users of our manuals.

24-hour support service

If you have any questions or concerns regarding the operation of your

equipment, please contact the Customer Network Resolution Center for

immediate assistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:

Arlington Heights, IL 800–433–5202. . . . . . . . .

Arlington Heights, International +1–847–632–5390.

Cork, Ireland 44–1793–565444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Swindon, England 44–1793–565444. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Material Available from

Motorola Infrastructure Group

Worldwide Cellular Services

Material available from Motorola Infrastructure Group Worldwide

Cellular Services, identified by a Motorola part number can be ordered

from your sales account manager or by calling (800) 453–7988.

General Safety

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

xiv

Remember! . . . Safety

depends on you!!

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all

phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in

this manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific

warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,

manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes

no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangers

of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should follow

these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe

operation of the equipment in your operating environment.

Ground the instrument

To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be

connected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a

three-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either plugged

into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a

three-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact

adapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to an

electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack and

mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical

Commission (IEC) safety standards.

Do not operate in an explosive

atmosphere

Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or

fumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environment

constitutes a definite safety hazard.

Keep away from live circuits

Operating personnel must:

Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service

Personnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may remove

equipment covers for internal subassembly, or component

replacement, or any internal adjustment.

Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certain

conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cable

removed.

Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.

Do not service or adjust alone

Do not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,

capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.

General Safety – continued

May 2000 xv

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Use caution when exposing or

handling the CRT

Breakage of the Cathode–Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocity

scattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,

avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should be

handled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safety

mask and gloves.

Do not substitute parts or

modify equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install

substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.

Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensure

that safety features are maintained.

Dangerous procedure

warnings

Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous

procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the

warnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safety

precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment

in your operating environment.

Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this

equipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, and

adjusting.

WARNING

Revision History

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

xvi

Manual Number

68P64114A36–O

Manual Title

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

CDMA 800/1700/1900 MHz

Version Information

The following table lists the manual version , date of version, and

remarks on the version.

Version

Level Date of

Issue Remarks

1Mar 1999 Draft manual

2Jun 1999 Preliminary manual

3Jul 1999 Validation and Verification

4Jul 1999 Second Preliminary

5Sep 1999 DVV Review

6Oct 1999 FOA manual

7Nov 1999 Add 1.7 GHz information.

8Apr 2000 Add –48 V information.

OMay 2000 General Release manual

Patent Notification

May 2000 xvii

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Patent numbers

This product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of the

following patents and other patents pending:

4128740 4661790 4860281 5036515 5119508 5204876 5247544 5301353

4193036 4667172 4866710 5036531 5121414 5204977 5251233 5301365

4237534 4672657 4870686 5038399 5123014 5207491 5255292 5303240

4268722 4694484 4872204 5040127 5127040 5210771 5257398 5303289

4282493 4696027 4873683 5041699 5127100 5212815 5259021 5303407

4301531 4704734 4876740 5047762 5128959 5212826 5261119 5305468

4302845 4709344 4881082 5048116 5130663 5214675 5263047 5307022

4312074 4710724 4885553 5055800 5133010 5214774 5263052 5307512

4350958 4726050 4887050 5055802 5140286 5216692 5263055 5309443

4354248 4729531 4887265 5058136 5142551 5218630 5265122 5309503

4367443 4737978 4893327 5060227 5142696 5220936 5268933 5311143

4369516 4742514 4896361 5060265 5144644 5222078 5271042 5311176

4369520 4751725 4910470 5065408 5146609 5222123 5274844 5311571

4369522 4754450 4914696 5067139 5146610 5222141 5274845 5313489

4375622 4764737 4918732 5068625 5152007 5222251 5276685 5319712

4485486 4764849 4941203 5070310 5155448 5224121 5276707 5321705

4491972 4775998 4945570 5073909 5157693 5224122 5276906 5321737

4517561 4775999 4956854 5073971 5159283 5226058 5276907 5323391

4519096 4797947 4970475 5075651 5159593 5228029 5276911 5325394

4549311 4799253 4972355 5077532 5159608 5230007 5276913 5327575

4550426 4802236 4972432 5077741 5170392 5233633 5276915 5329547

4564821 4803726 4979207 5077757 5170485 5235612 5278871 5329635

4573017 4811377 4984219 5081641 5170492 5235614 5280630 5339337

4581602 4811380 4984290 5083304 5182749 5239294 5285447 D337328

4590473 4811404 4992753 5090051 5184349 5239675 5287544 D342249

4591851 4817157 4998289 5093632 5185739 5241545 5287556 D342250

4616314 4827507 5020076 5095500 5187809 5241548 5289505 D347004

4636791 4829543 5021801 5105435 5187811 5241650 5291475 D349689

4644351 4833701 5022054 5111454 5193102 5241688 5295136 RE31814

4646038 4837800 5023900 5111478 5195108 5243653 5297161

4649543 4843633 5028885 5113400 5200655 5245611 5299228

4654655 4847869 5030793 5117441 5203010 5245629 5301056

4654867 4852090 5031193 5119040 5204874 5245634 5301188

Patent Notification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

xviii

Notes

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Chapter 1: Introduction

Table of Contents

Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scope of This Document 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Document Composition 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDMA LMF Product Description 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Online Help 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose of the Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why Optimize? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What Is Optimization? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When to Optimize 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Test Equipment 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Policy 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Calibration 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Cable Calibration 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm–up 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Specifications 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Hardware Requirements 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment List 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Equipment 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Documentation 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Required Documents 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intended Reader Profile 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Equipment Identification 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frames 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ancillary Equipment Frame Identification 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Frame Description 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Frame Module Location & Identification 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sector Configuration 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout

May 2000 1-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Scope of This Document

This document provides information pertaining to the optimization and

audit tests of Motorola SC 4812T Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS)

equipment frames equipped with trunked high–power Linear Power

Amplifiers (LPAs) and their associated internal and external interfaces.

This document assumes the following prerequisites:

SThe BTS frames and cabling have been installed per the BTS Frame

Installation Manual – 68P09226A18, which covers the physical “bolt

down” of all SC series equipment frames, and the SC 4812T CDMA BTS

Installation Manual –68P64113A87 which covers BTS specific cabling

configurations.

In most applications the same test procedure is used for all equipment

variations. However, decision break points are provided throughout the

procedure when equipment specific tests are required.

As the CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (LMF)

capability comes on–line, applicable LMF based

procedures will be incorporated. Eventually, only the

CDMA LMF platform will be supported as the

recommended customer method of interfacing with and

servicing the SC series BTS equipment.

IMPORTANT

We at Motorola Technical Education & Documentation have strived to

incorporate into this document the many suggestions and inputs received

from you, the customer, since the inception of the SC product line. At

the same time, we have tried to insure that the scope of the document

targets both the novice and expert site technician and engineer with

the information required to successfully perform the task at hand. If

in some areas, the manual seems to cover the test in too much detail (or

not enough detail) we hope you will keep this in mind.

Optimization Manual: Scope and Layout – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-2

Document Composition

This document covers the following major areas.

SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (such

as component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to be

considered by the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) before optimization

or tests are performed.

SPreliminary Operations, consisting of pre–power up tests, jumper

configuration of BTS sub–assemblies, and initial application of power

to the BTS equipment frames. Download of all BTS processor boards,

and LPAs.

SOptimization/Calibration, consisting of downloading all BTS

processor boards, LPA verification, radio frequency (RF) path

verification, Bay Level Offset (BLO) calibration, and Radio

Frequency Diagnostic System (RFDS) functions and calibration

SAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP

scripts executed by the LMF and used to verify all major transmit

(TX) and receive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS

equipment. Also generates an ATP report.

SOptional manual performance tests used to verify specific areas of site

operation or to verify regulation compliance. These tests are typically

used to isolate faults down to the module level and information

necessary to better understand equipment operation.

SSite turnover after ATP is completed.

SAppendices that contain pertinent Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset,

CDMA operating frequency programming information, and output

power data tables, along with additional data sheets that are filled out

manually by the CFE at the site.

CDMA LMF Product Description

The CDMA LMF is a graphical user interface (GUI) based LMF. This

product is specifically designed to provide cellular communications field

personnel the vehicle to support the following CDMA BTS operations:

SInstallation

SMaintenance

SCalibration

SOptimization

Online Help

Task oriented online help is available in the CDMA LMF by clicking on

Help from the menu bar.

Purpose of the Optimization

May 2000 1-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Why Optimize?

Proper optimization and calibration assures:

SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.

SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.

What Is Optimization?

Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normal

equipment variations. Cables that interconnect the BTS and Duplexer

assemblies (if used), for example, are cut and installed at the time of the

BTS frame installation at the site. Site optimization guarantees that the

combined losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and

built-in tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate, causing

improper site operation.

Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receive and

transmit paths at the BTS site, and stores that value in a database.

SThe RX path for the starter frame starts at the ancillary equipment

frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the

ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna

feedline port, through the RX input port on the top of the frame,

through the bandpass filter, Combiner Input/Output (CIO) card,

Multicoupler Preselector Card (MPC), and additional splitter circuitry,

ending at a Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Channel

Processor (C–CCP) backplane Broad Band Transceiver (BBX2) slot in

the C–CCP shelf.

SThe RX path for the expansion frame starts at the ancillary equipment

frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna feedline port, through the

ancillary equipment frame RFDS RX directional coupler antenna

feedline port, through the RX input port on the top of the starter

frame, through the bandpass filter and CIO card, out the expansion

port at the top of the starter frame, through the expansion cable to the

expansion port on the expansion frame, through the Expansion

Multicoupler Preselector Card (EMPC) and CIO, ending at a Broad

Band Transceiver (BBX2) slot in the C–CCP shelf.

SThe TX path starts at the BBX2, through the C–CCP backplane slot,

travels through the LPA/Combiner TX Filter and ends at the top of the

RFDS TX directional coupler antenna feedline port (CDMA), installed

on the ancillary equipment frame. If the RFDS option is added, then

the TX path continues and ends at the top of the RFDS TX directional

coupler antenna feedline port installed in the ancillary equipment

frame. The TX paths are identical for the starter and expansion

frames.

. . . continued on next page

Purpose of the Optimization – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-4

These values are factored in by the BTS equipment internally, leaving

only site specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics

to be factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective Radiated

Power (ERP) output power requirements.

Each C–CCP shelf BBX2 board is optimized to a specific RX and TX

antenna port. (One BBX2 board acts in a redundant capacity for BBX2’s

1–12, and is optimized to all antenna ports.) A single value is generated

for each path, thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would

occur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss of

each element in the path.

When to Optimize

New Installations

After the initial site installation, it must be prepared for operation. This

preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial power–up,

download of operating code, and Clock Synchronization Module (CSM)

verification.

Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes performance

verification and calibration of all transmit and receive RF paths, and

download of accumulated calibration data.

After optimization, a series of manual pre–ATP verification tests are

covered that address alarm/redundancy tests.

After manual pre–Acceptance Test Procedure (pre–ATP) verification

tests, a series of manual ATP CDMA verification tests are covered using

the actual equipment set up. An ATP is also required before the site can

be placed in service.

Site Expansion

Optimization is also required after expansion of a site.

Periodic Optimization

Periodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on the

requirements of the overall system.

Repaired Sites

Refer to Appendix C for detailed basic guideline tables and

detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix outlining the

minimum tests that must be performed anytime a BTS

subassembly or RF cable associated with it is replaced.

IMPORTANT

Required Test Equipment

May 2000 1-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Policy

The LMF is used in conjunction with Motorola recommended test

equipment and is part of a “calibrated test set”. To ensure consistent,

reliable, and repeatable optimization test results, only recommended test

equipment supported by the LMF must be used to optimize the BTS

equipment.

During manual testing, you can, of course, substitute test

equipment with other test equipment models not supported

by the LMF, but those models must meet the same

technical specifications.

NOTE

The customer has the responsibility of accounting for any measurement

variances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introduced

as a result of test equipment substitutions. Before beginning

optimization or troubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment

needed is on hand and operating properly.

Test Equipment Calibration

Optimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipment

service, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.

Follow the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommended

maintenance and calibration schedules closely.

Test Cable Calibration

Equipment test cables are very important in optimization. Motorola

recommends that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the test

cables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion loss

within the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cable

insertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.

Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the LMF

during the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate test

cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with the

characterization information prior to field optimization.

Equipment Warm–up

After arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in and

turned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long as

possible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed–up for

a minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or Radio

Frequency Diagnostic Subsystem (RFDS) calibration procedures.

SCommunications Test Set

SRubidium Time Base

SPower Meter

Required Test Equipment – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-6

Test Equipment Specifications

Test equipment specification requirements for the test equipment (or

configuration of test equipment) used to make up the general test

equipment (DVM, etc) are given in the following paragraphs.

LMF Hardware Requirements

Motorola recommends an LMF computer platform that meets the

following requirements:

SNotebook computer

S266 MHz (32–bit CPU) processor

S4 GB internal hard disk drive

SColor display with 1024 x 768 (recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel

resolution

S64 MB RAM

SCD ROM drive

S3 1/2 inch floppy drive

SSerial port (COM 1)

SParallel port (LPT 1)

SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)

with a 10Base–T–to–coax adapter

SWindows 98/NT operating system

Test Equipment List

The following pieces of test equipment are required during the

optimization procedure. Common assorted tools like screwdrivers and

frame keys are not listed but are still required. Read the owner’s manual

on all of the following major pieces of test equipment to understand their

individual operation prior to use in optimization.

Always refer to specific OEM test equipment

documentation for detailed operating instructions.

NOTE

Ethernet LAN Transceiver

SPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter: 3COM Model –

Etherlink III 3C589B

. . . continued on next page

Required Test Equipment – continued

May 2000 1-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

10BaseT/10Base2 Converter

STransition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2

Converter

– or –

STransition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2

Converter

Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to

interface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.

NOTE

3C–PC–COMBO CBL

SConnects to the 3COM PCMCIA card and eliminates the need for a

10BaseT/10base2 Converter.

RS–232 to GPIB Interface

SNational Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04X

RS232 serial null modem cable or equivalent; used to interface the

LMF to the test equipment.

SStandard RS–232 cable can be used with the following modifications

(see Figure 1-1):

– This solution passes only the 3 minimum electrical connections

between the LMF and the GPIB interface. The control signals are

jumpered as enabled on both ends of the RS–232 cable (9–pin D).

TX and RX signals are crossed as Null Modem effect. Pin 5 is the

ground reference.

– Short pins 7 and 8 together, and short pins 1, 4, and 6 together on

each connector.

Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

ON BOTH CONNECTORS

SHORT PINS 7, 8;

SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6

9–PIN D–FEMALE 9–PIN D–FEMALE

DSR DSR

FW00362

. . . continued on next page

Required Test Equipment – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-8

Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit

SMotorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors on

opposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a null

modem transformation between cables. This board can be used for

10–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.

SMotorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent; used to interface

the LMF serial port connection to GLI2, CSM and LPA debug serial

ports.

S25–pin D to 25–pin D serial cable; used to interface the PC to the null

modem board.

Communications System Analyzer

The communication system analyzer is used during optimization and

testing of the RF communications portion of BTS equipment and

provides the following functions:

(1) Frequency counter

(2) RF power meter (average and code domain)

(3) RF Signal Generator (capable of CDMA modulation)

(4) Spectrum Analyzer

(5) CDMA Code Domain analyzer

Four types of Communication System Analyzer are currently supported

by the LMF. They are:

SHP8921A/600 Analyzer – Including 83203B CDMA Interface,

manual control system card, and 83236A/B PCS Interface for

1700/1900 MHz BTS.

SAdvantest R3465 Analyzer – Including R3561L Test Source Unit

SHP8935 Analyzer

SCyberTest Communication Analyzer

GPIB Cables

SHewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) long

used to interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.

Power Meter

One of the following power meters is required with the HP8921 and

Advantest analyzers:

SHewlett Packard Model HP HP437B with HP8481A power sensor

SGigatronics 8541C with model 80601A power sensor

Timing Reference Cables

STwo BNC-male to BNC-male RG316 cables; 3.05 m (10 ft.) long.

Used to connect the communications analyzer to the front timing

reference of the CSM cards in the BTS frame.

Digital Multimeter

SFluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used for

precision dc and ac measurements, requiring 4–1/2 digits.

. . . continued on next page

Required Test Equipment – continued

May 2000 1-9

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Directional Coupler

SNarda Model 30661 30 dB (Motorola part no. 58D09732W01)

1900 MHz coupler terminated with two Narda Model 375BN–M

loads, or equivalent.

SNarda Model 30445 30 dB (Motorola Part No. 58D09643T01 )

800 MHz coupler terminated with two Narda Model 375BN–M loads,

or equivalent.

RF Attenuator

S20 dB fixed attenuator, 20 W (Narda 768–20); used with 1.7/1.9 GHz

test cable calibrations or during general troubleshooting procedures.

RF Terminations/Loads

SAt least three 100–Watt (or larger) non–radiating RF

terminations/loads.

Miscellaneous RF Adapters, Loads, etc

SAs required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for

various test set ups. Should include at least two 50 Ohm loads (type

N) for calibration and one RF short, two N–Type Female–to–Female

Adapters.

LAN Cable

SBNC–to BNC 50 ohm coaxial cable [.91 m (3 ft) maximum] with an

F–to–F adapter, used to connect the 10BaseT–to–coaxial adapter to

the BTS LAN connector.

High–impedance Conductive Wrist Strap

SMotorola Model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working with

modules.

Optional Equipment

Not all optional equipment specified here will be supported

by the LMF in automated tests or when executing various

measure type command line interface (CLI) commands. It

is meant to serve as a list of additional equipment that

might be required during maintenance and troubleshooting

operations.

NOTE

Frequency Counter

SStanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If direct

measurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.

. . . continued on next page

Required Test Equipment – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-10

Spectrum Analyzer

SSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) or

equivalent; required for manual tests.

LAN Tester

SModel NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); Used to

supplement LAN tests using the ohmmeter.

Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment

SAs required for local application

Oscilloscope

STektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; for waveform viewing, timing,

and measurements or during general troubleshooting procedure.

2–way Splitter

SMini–Circuits Model ZFSC–2–2500 or equivalent; provides the

diversity receive input to the BTS

High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard

SStanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent – required for CSM

and Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)

frequency verification.

Itasca Alarms Test Box

SItasca CGDSCMIS00014 – This test box may be used as a tool to

assist in the testing of customer alarms.

Required Documentation

May 2000 1-11

68P64114A36–O

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Required Documents

The following documents are required to perform optimization of the

cell site equipment:

SSite Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), which

includes:

– General Site Information

– Floor Plan

– RF Power Levels

– Frequency Plan (includes Site PN and Operating Frequencies)

– Channel Allocation (Paging, Traffic, etc.)

– Board Placement

– Site Wiring List

– CDF files (bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf)

SSC 4812T CDMA BTS Hardware Installation; 68P64113A87

SDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)

SCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide; 68P64114A21

SSC OMC–R/CBSC System Operator Procedures; 68P09226A25

SCDMA RFDS Hardware Installation manual; 68P64113A93

SCDMA RFDS User’s Guide, 68P64113A37

SEquipment Manuals for non-Motorola test equipment

Intended Reader Profile

The information in this manual set is intended for use by the cellular

communications craftsperson(s) in the initial installation and

configuration, as well as the day-to-day operation and maintenance of a

BTS.

The user of this information has a general understanding of telephony, as

used in the operation of the Public Switched Telephone Network

(PSTN), and is familiar with these concepts as they are applied in the

cellular and maintenance mobile/portable radiotelephone environment.

The user also needs a working knowledge of the computer platform

operating system being used (for example, Windows 95 or

Windows 98).

BTS Equipment Identification

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-12

Frames

The Motorola SC 4812T BTS can consist of the following equipment

frames:

SAt least one BTS starter frame

– +27 V BTS (see Figure 1-2)

– –48V BTS (see Figure 1-3)

SAncillary equipment frame (or wall mounted equipment)

SExpansion frames

– +27 V BTS (see Figure 1-4)

– –48V BTS (see Figure 1-5)

Ancillary Equipment Frame

Identification

Equipment listed below can be wall mounted or mounted

in a standard 19 inch frame. The description assumes that

all equipment is mounted in a frame for clarity.

NOTE

If equipped with the RF Diagnostic Subsystem (RFDS) option, the

RFDS and directional couplers are the interface between the site

antennas and the BTS or Modem frame. The RFDS equipment includes:

SDirectional couplers

SSite receive bandpass/bandreject filters

SRFDS

BTS Frame Description

The BTS is the interface between the span lines to/from the Cellsite Base

Station Controller (CBSC) and the site antennas. This frame is described

in three sections:

SThe top interconnect plate where all connections are made.

SThe upper portion of the frame which houses circuit breakers, cooling

fans, and the Combined CDMA Channel Processor (C–CCP) shelf.

SThe lower portion of the frame which houses the LPA fans, LPAs, and

TX filter/combiners.

SThe –48 V version of the BTS also has a section below the LPAs

containing a power conversion shelf that supplies power to the LPAs.

Use the illustrations that follow to visually identify the major

components, that make up the Motorola SC 4812T BTS frame.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Equipment Identification – continued

May 2000 1-13

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Top Interconnect Plate (see Figure 1-6 or Figure 1-7)

All cabling to and from the BTS equipment frames is via the

interconnect panel on the top of each frame. Connections made here

include:

SSpan lines

SRX antennas

STX antenna

SAlarm connections

SPower input

SLAN connections

SGPS input

SRemote GPS Distribution (RGD)

SLFR input

SExpansion frame connection

SGround connections

C–CCP Shelf (see Figure 1-10)

SC–CCP backplane and cage

SPower supply modules

SCDMA clock distribution (CCD) boards

SCSM and HSO/LFR boards

SAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) boards

SGroup Line Interface II (GLI2) cards

SMulticoupler Preselector (MPC) boards (starter frame only)

SExpansion Multicoupler Preselector (EMPC) boards (expansion

frames)

SSwitch card

SMCC24 boards

SMCC8E boards

SBBX2 boards

SCIO boards

PA Shelves (see Figure 1-11 or Figure 1-12)

SLPA cages

SLPA trunking backplanes

SSingle Tone Linear Power Amplifier (STLPA, or more commonly

referred to as “LPA”) modules

SLPA fan modules

SLPA Combiner Cage (+27 V BTS)

STX filter combiners or bandpass filters

. . . continued on next page

BTS Equipment Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-14

–48 V Power Conversion Shelf (see Figure 1-15)

SPower conversion backplane and shelf

SPower conversion boards

SPower conversion alarm card

SFan modules

SPower distribution assembly

SAir plenum

BTS Equipment Identification – continued

May 2000 1-15

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Expansion I/O

Housing

For clarity, doors are not shown. FW00214

Front Cosmetic

Panel

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 – 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

RX In (1A – 6A

and 1B – 6B)

Exhaust Region

C–CCP Cage

Breakers

Combiner

Section

RGD (Needed for

Expansion only)

LPA Cage

Alarm

Connectors

Figure 1-2: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame

BTS Equipment Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-16

Figure 1-3: –48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame

FW00477

Expansion I/O

Housing

For clarity, doors are not shown.

Front Cosmetic

Panel

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 – 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

RX In (1A – 6A

and 1B – 6B)

Exhaust Region

C–CCP Cage

Breakers

Combiner

Section

RGD (Needed for

Expansion only)

LPA Cage

Power

Conversion

Shelf

Breakers

Alarms

BTS Equipment Identification – continued

May 2000 1-17

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 1-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 – 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

Expansion Port

to another BTS

Exhaust Region

C–CCP Cage

Breakers

LPA Cage

For clarity, doors are not shown.

FW00093

LAN

Combiner

Section

BTS Equipment Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-18

Figure 1-5: –48 V SC 4812T BTS Expansion Frame

FW00478

Expansion Port

to another BTS

For clarity, doors are not shown.

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 – 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

Exhaust Region

C–CCP Cage

Breakers

Combiner

Section

LPA Cage

Power

Conversion

Shelf

LAN

Breakers

Alarms

Frame Module Location & Identification

May 2000 1-19

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 1-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate

ALARM

CONNECTORS

OUT

LAN

GPS

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR/

ALARM B 4

GND

TX OUT

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC

HSO

ALARM A

EXP I/O

RGD

LOW FREQUENCY

RECEIVER / HSO

FRONT

REAR

SPAN I/O

RF EXPANSION PORT

(TO ANOTHER BTS)

TRANSMIT

ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

POWER INPUT

RECEIVE ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

SITE I/OSPAN I/O

FW00215

GPS IN LAN CONNECTIONS

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-20

Figure 1-7: –48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR

ALARM B 4

GND

TX OUT

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR –48VDC

HSO/

ALARM A

EXP I/O

RGD

HSO/LFR

FRONT

REAR

SPAN I/O

RF EXPANSION

PORT (TO

ANOTHER BTS)

TRANSMIT

ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

POWER INPUT

RECEIVE ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

SPAN I/O

FW00479

SITE I/O

ALARM

CONNECTORS

LAN

CONNECTIONS

GPS IN

SITE I/O

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

May 2000 1-21

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 1-8: +27 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

EXP IN

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR/

ALARM B

GND

TX OUT

FRONT

REAR

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC

HSO

EXP OUT

ALARM A

FW00082

EXP IN

HOUSING

TRANSMIT

ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

EXP OUT

HOUSING (ADDED

ONLY WHEN

USING SECOND

EXPANSION

FRAME)

SITE I/O LFR/HSO

RGD

POWER

INPUT

LAN

SPAN I/O SPAN I/O

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-22

Figure 1-9: –48 V SC 4812T Expansion Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

EXP IN

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR

ALARM B

GND

TX OUT

FRONT

REAR

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALS

HSO/

EXP OUT

ALARM A

FW00480

EXP IN

HOUSING

TRANSMIT

ANTENNA

CONNECTORS

EXP OUT

HOUSING (ADDED

ONLY WHEN

USING SECOND

EXPANSION

FRAME)

SITE I/O

RGD

POWER

INPUT

LAN

SPAN I/O SPAN I/O

LIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR –48 VDC

SITE I/O

HSO/LFR

RF FILTER PORTS NOT USED

IN EXPANSION FRAME

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

May 2000 1-23

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 1-10: SC 4812T C–CCP Shelf

19 mm Filler Panel

PS–3

AMR–1

CSM–1

CSM–2

38 mm Filler Panel

AMR–2

GLI2–1GLI2–2

MCC24–6

BBX2–1

BBX2–2

BBX2–3

BBX2–4

BBX2–5

BBX2–6

BBX2–RSwitch

MPC/EMPC–1MPC/EMPC–2

CIO

BBX2–7

BBX2–8

BBX2–9

BBX2–10

BBX2–11

BBX2–12

MCC24–5

MCC24–4

MCC24–3

MCC24–2

MCC24–1

MCC24–12

MCC24–11

MCC24–10

MCC24–9

MCC24–8

MCC24–7

PS–2

PS–1

CCD–2 CCD–1

NOTE: MCCs may be

MCC24s or MCC8Es.

HSO/LFR

FW00295

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-24

LPA1A

LPA1B

LPA1C

LPA1D

LPA3A

LPA3B

LPA3C

LPA3D

LPA2A

LPA2B

LPA2C

LPA2D

LPA4A

LPA4B

LPA4C

LPA4D

FAN

MODULE

(TYPICAL)

FILTERS /

COMBINERS

(2 TO 1 COMBINER

SHOWN)

Note

No adjacent carriers may exist within the same TX filter

combiner. “Adjacent” is defined as fc1 and fc2 being

1.25 MHz apart (center–to–center). “Non–adjacent” is

defined as fc1 and fc2 being >2.50 MHz apart

(center–to–center).

123

456

4–CARRIER CONFIGURATION

CARRIER

123

456

FW00296

Figure 1-11: +27 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration – 4 Carrier with 2:1 Combiners

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

May 2000 1-25

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 1-12: –48 V SC 4812T LPA Configuration – 4 Carrier, 3–Sector with 2:1 Combiners

LPA1A

LPA1B

Note

No adjacent carriers may exist within the same TX filter

combiner. “Adjacent” is defined as fc1 and fc2 being

1.25 MHz apart (center–to–center). “Non–adjacent” is

defined as fc1 and fc2 being >2.50 MHz apart

(center–to–center).

4–CARRIER CONFIGURATION

CARRIER CARRIER

LPA1C

LPA1D

LPA3C

LPA3D

LPA2A

LPA2B

LPA2C

LPA2D

LPA4C

LPA4D

FW00481

3 4

LPA3A

LPA3B

LPA4A

LPA4B

FAN

MODULE

(TYPICAL)

FILTERS /

COMBINERS

(2 TO 1 COMBINER

SHOWN)

–48 Volt

SC 4812T

Sector Configuration

There are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-1

outlines the basic requirements. When carrier capacity is greater than

two, a 2:1 or 4:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers,

bandpass filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending on

sectorization and channel sequencing.

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-26

Table 1-1: BTS Sector Configuration

Number

of carriers Number

of sectors Channel

spacing Filter requirements

13 or 6 N/A Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner

(2:1 or 4:1)

2 6 Non–adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)

2 6 Adjacent Not supported in single frame

2 3 Non–adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)

2 3 Adjacent Bandpass Filter

3,4 3 Non–adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)

3,4 3 Adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

May 2000 1-27

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 1-2: Sector Configurations

Config Ref. No. Description

3–Sector/2–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with optional 2:1 cavity

combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels. Note that 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6

total).

1TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1

N/A N/A N/A BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 2

6–Sector/2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity

combiners for 6 sectors/2 carriers for non–adjacent channels.

2TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 1

BBX2–7 BBX2–8 BBX2–9 BBX2–10 BBX2–11 BBX2–12 2

3–Sector/2–NON–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity

combiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for non–adjacent channels.

3TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1

BBX2–7 BBX2–8 BBX2–9 N/A N/A N/A 2

3–Sector/4–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combiners

for 3 sector/4 carriers for adjacent channels.

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

4BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1

BBX2–7 BBX2–8 BBX2–9 N/A N/A N/A 2

N/A N/A N/A BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 3

N/A N/A N/A BBX2–10 BBX2–11 BBX2–12 4

3–Sector / 2–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with bandpass filters for

3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels.

5TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1

N/A N/A N/A BBX2–7 BBX2–8 BBX2–9 2

3–Sector/3 or 4–NON–ADJACENT Carriers – The configuration below maps TX with 4:1

cavity combiners for 3 sectors/3 or 4 carriers for non–adjacent channels.

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

6BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1

BBX2–7 BBX2–8 BBX2–9 N/A N/A N/A 2

BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 N/A N/A N/A 3

BBX2–10 BBX2–11 BBX2–12 N/A N/A N/A 4

6–Sector/1–Carrier – The configuration below maps TX with either bandpass filters or 2:1 cavity

combiners for 6 sector/1 carrier.

TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#

BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 1

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-28

Numbering

456

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

LPA 4B

LPA 4A

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

Sector

3 Sector

Sector

3 Sector

(6 Sector)

Numbering

2 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector or 6 Sector

C1, S1–3

(C1, S1–3) C2, S1–3

(C2, S1–3)

C3, S1–3

(C1, S4–6) C4, S1–3

(C2, S4–6)

(6 Sector)

123

456

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

LPA 4B

LPA 4A

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

Sector

Numbering Sector

Numbering

4 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector

C1, S1–3 C2, S1–3

C3, S1–3 C4, S1–3

123

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

Sector

3 Sector

Numbering Sector

3 Sector

Numbering

Dual Bandpass Filter

3 Sector Only

C1, S1–3 C2, S1–3

123

456

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

Sector

Numbering Dual Bandpass Filter

6 Sector

C1, S1–3

C1, S4–6

2 Carrier Maximum 1 Carrier Only

6 Sector

123

Figure 1-13: +27 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters

Note: See Table 1-2 Configuration

Reference Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: See Table 1-2 Configuration

Reference Number 6.

Note: See Table 1-2 Configuration

Reference Number 5. Note: See Table 1-2 Configuration

Reference Number 7.

FW00297

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

May 2000 1-29

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 1-14: –48 V SC4812T LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters

Note: See Table 1-2 Configuration

Reference Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: See Table 1-2 Configuration

Reference Number 6.

Note: See Table 1-2 Configuration

Reference Number 5. Note: See Table 1-2 Configuration

Reference Number 7.

REF FW00482

Numbering

Sector

3 Sector

Sector

3 Sector

(6 Sector)

Numbering

2 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector or 6 Sector

C1, S1–3

(C1, S1–3) C2, S1–3

(C2, S1–3)

C3, S1–3

(C1, S4–6) C4, S1–3

(C2, S4–6)

(6 Sector)

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

LPA 4B

LPA 4A

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

Sector

Numbering Sector

Numbering

4 to 1 Combiner

3 Sector

C1, S1–3 C2, S1–3

C3, S1–3 C4, S1–3

LPA 1A

LPA 1B 1

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

LPA 4B

LPA 4A

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D LPA 2D

LPA 2C

LPA 2B

LPA 2A

Sector

3 Sector

Numbering Sector

3 Sector

Numbering

Dual Bandpass Filter

3 Sector Only

C1, S1–3 C2, S1–3

2 Carrier Maximum

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 3C

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3D

Sector

Numbering

Dual Bandpass Filter

6 Sector

C1, S1–3

C1, S4–6

1 Carrier Only

6 Sector

3 Sector

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-30

Figure 1-15: –48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf

FW00501

PS–6

AMR

PS–5

PS–4

PS–9

PS–8

PS–7

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

May 2000 1-31

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 1-16: CDMA (COBRA) RFDS Layout

AMR–B

(RS–485 SERIAL)

AMR–A

(RS–485 SERIAL)

Cobra RFDS external housing

(Shown With Cover off)

POWER SUPPLY

ON/OFF ROCKER

SWITCH

MMI PORT AND

PWR/ALARM LED

Cobra RFDS Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)

(shown removed from external housing)

CHASSIS GND

POWER

CONNECTOR

Cobra RFDS RF connector

panel detail

(shown from rear)

ELECTRICAL GND

FRONT VIEW

CASU 1

CASU 2

FWTIC

SUA ESN LABEL

(FOR SC XXXX SERIES BTS)

MMI

LEDS

ESN LABEL

(FOR SC 6XX SERIES BTS)

FW00138

Frame Module Location & Identification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

1-32

Notes

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Chapter 2: Preliminary Operations

Table of Contents

Preliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell Site Types 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDF 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Equipage Verification 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Frame C–CCP Shelf Configuration Switch 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre–Power–up Tests 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Objective 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cabling Inspection 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Pre-test (RFDS) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Power–up Tests 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power-up Procedures 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Common Power Supply Verification 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Power-up (RFDS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Initial Power-up (BTS) 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Preliminary Operations: Overview

May 2000 2-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Introduction

This section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifying

module placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP) switch

settings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTS

application. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures are

presented.

Cell Site Types

Sites are configured as Omni with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3–sectored

with a maximum of 4 carriers, and 6–sectored with a maximum of 2

carriers. Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized

accordingly. For more information on the differences in site types, please

refer to the BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installation manual.

CDF

The Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage data

information and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. The

number of modem frames, C–CCP shelves, BBX2 boards,

MCC24/MCC8E boards (per cage), and linear power amplifier

assignments are some of the equipage data included in the CDF.

Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files are

used for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are

provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the

correct CDF files can cause system errors. Failure to use

the correct CDF files to log into a live (traffic carrying)

site can shut down the site.

IMPORTANT

Site Equipage Verification

Review the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage data

to the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspect

and verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame and

ancillary equipment frame.

Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap

while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage

by ESD. After removal, the card/module should be placed

on a conductive surface or back into the anti–static

shipping bag.

CAUTION

Initial Installation of

Boards/Modules

Follow the procedure in Table 2-1 to verify the initial installation of

boards/modules.

. . . continued on next page

Preliminary Operations: Overview – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

2-2

68P64114A36–O

Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules

Step Action

1Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves as

required. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.

NOTE

On 800 MHz systems, the Switch Card has a configuration switch that must match the site

configuration (see Figure 2-1).

2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial Number

Checklist” in the site logbook.

Figure 2-1: Switch Card

Switch Card

1234

BTS

3 Sector

6 Sector

SHIELDS

Configuration

Switch

NOTE:CONFIGURATION SWITCH ON

800 MHZ SWITCH CARD ONLY.

SHOWN FOR 3 SECTOR BTS.

SWITCH 1 CHOOSES BTS OR MF.

SWITCH 4 CHOOSES 3–SECTOR OR

6 SECTOR. SWITCHES 2 & 3 ARE NOT

USED.

FW00379

Preliminary Operations: Overview – continued

May 2000 2-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Setting Frame C–CCP Shelf

Configuration Switch

The backplane switch settings behind the fan module nearest the breaker

panel should be set as shown in Figure 2-2.

The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to the

BTS equipment.

Figure 2-2: Backplane DIP Switch Settings – SC 4812T

19 mm Filter Panel

Power Supply

AMR / MACH

HSO

CSM

39 mm Filter Panel

AMR / MACH

GLI2GLI2

MCC24–6

BBX2–1

BBX2–2

BBX2–3

BBX2–4

BBX2–5

BBX2–6

BBX2–R

Switch

MPCMPC

CIO

BBX2–7

BBX2–8

BBX2–9

BBX2–10

BBX2–11

BBX2–12

MCC24–5

MCC24–4

MCC24–3

MCC24–2

MCC24–1

MCC24–12

MCC24–11

MCC24–10

MCC24–9

MCC24–8

MCC24–7

Power Supply

CCD CCD

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

FAN

MODULE

PWR/ALM

REAR

FRONT

OFF

SC 4812T C–CCP SHELF

FAN MODULE

REMOVED

STARTER

FRAME

SETTING

OFF

EXPANSION

FRAME 1

SETTING

OFF

EXPANSION

FRAME 2

SETTING

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

BOTTOM / TOP

RIGHT / LEFT

MODEM_FRAME_ID_1

MODEM_FRAME_ID_0

FW00151REF

Pre–Power–up Tests

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

2-4

Objective

This procedure checks for any electrical short circuits and verifies the

operation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTS power supply units prior

to applying power for the first time.

Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required to complete the pre–power–up

tests:

SDigital Multimeter (DMM)

Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap

while handling the any circuit card/module to prevent

damage by ESD.

CAUTION

Cabling Inspection

Using the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola Systems

Engineering, verify that the following cable systems are properly

connected:

SReceive RF cabling – up to 12 RX cables

STransmit RF cabling – up to six TX cables

SGPS

SLFR

For positive power applications (+27 V):

SThe positive power cable is red.

SThe negative power cable (ground) is black.

For negative power applications (–48 V):

SThe negative power cable is red or blue.

SThe positive power cable (ground) is black.

In all cases, the black power cable is at ground potential.

IMPORTANT

Pre–Power–up Tests – continued

May 2000 2-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) Before applying any power to the BTS frame, follow the procedure in

Table 2-2 while referring to Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 for +27 V

systems or to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 for –48 V systems to verify

there are no shorts in the BTS frame DC distribution system.

Table 2-2: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)

Step Action

1Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying power to the frame are OFF or disabled.

2On each frame:

SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C–CCP shelf and LPA shelves, but

leave them in their associated slots.

SSet C–CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeled

C–CCP 1, 2, 3 on the +27 V BTS C–CCP power distribution panel and labeled POWER

1,4,5,2,6,7,3,8,9 on the –48 V C–CCP power distribution panel).

SSet LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out the LPA breakers (8 breakers, labeled 1A–1B

through 4C–4D – located on the C–CCP power distribution panel in the +27 V BTS or on the power

conversion shelf power distribution panel in the –48 V BTS).

3Verify that the resistance from the power (+ or –) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal on

the top of the frame measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-3).

SIf reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by the

breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (or

missing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).

4Set the C–CCP (POWER) breakers to the ON position by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat

Step 3 after turning on each breaker.

* IMPORTANT

IMPORTANT

If the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω after inserting any board/module, a short probably exists in that

board/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate the

problem before proceeding.

5Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules for the C–CCP shelf and into their associated slots one

at a time. Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finally

indicating approximately 500 Ω.

! CAUTION

CAUTION

Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:

– (in +27 V BTS C–CCP shelf)

– (in –48 V BTS C–CCP shelf)

STPN4045A

PWR CONV CDMA RCVR

STPN4009

PWR CONV CDMA RCVR

6Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C–CCP shelf.

Repeat Step 3 after inserting and locking each board or module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, stopping

at approximately 500 Ω..

. . . continued on next page

Pre–Power–up Tests – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

2-6

Table 2-2: DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame)

Step Action

7Set the LPA breakers ON by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat Step 3 after turning on each

breaker.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,

stopping at approximately 500 Ω..

8In the –48 V BTS, insert and lock the DC/DC LPA converter modules into their associated slots one at

a time. Repeat Step 3 after inserting each module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter steadily climbs in resistance as capacitors charge, finally

indicating approximately 500 Ω

indicating

approximately

500

Ω

! CAUTION

Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:

– (in –48 V BTS power conversion shelf)

STPN4044A

PWR CONV LPA

9Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.

Repeat Step 3 after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan module.

SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,

stopping at approximately 500 Ω..

Pre–Power–up Tests – continued

May 2000 2-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

POWER INPUT

TOP OF FRAME

BREAKER PANEL

LPA

BREAKERS

C–CCP

BREAKERS

GND

TX OUT

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC

LFR/

HSO

Figure 2-3: +27 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test

Breakering:

S Two LPAs on each trunking backplane breakered together

S Designed for peak LPA current of 15 amps (30 amp breakers)

S Unused TX paths do not need to be terminated

S Single feed for C–CCP

S Dual feed for LPA

FW00298

. . . continued on next page

Pre–Power–up Tests – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

2-8

Figure 2-4: +27 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame

Expansion I/O

Housing

For clarity, doors are not shown. FW00214

Front Cosmetic

Panel

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 – 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

RX In (1A – 6A

and 1B – 6B)

Exhaust Region

C–CCP Cage

Breakers

Combiner

Section

RGD (Needed for

Expansion only)

LPA Cage

Pre–Power–up Tests – continued

May 2000 2-9

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 2-5: –48 V BTS DC Distribution Pre-test

POWER INPUT

TOP OF FRAME

C–CCP BREAKER

LPA

BREAKER

GND

TX OUT

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS WIRED FOR –48 VDC

LFR

HSO/

Breakering:

S Two LPAs on each trunking backplane breakered together

S Designed for peak LPA current of 15 amps (30 amp breakers)

S Unused TX paths do not need to be terminated

S Single feed for C–CCP

S Dual feed for LPA

FW00483

Pre–Power–up Tests – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

2-10

Figure 2-6: –48 V SC 4812T BTS Starter Frame

FW00477

Expansion I/O

Housing

For clarity, doors are not shown.

Front Cosmetic

Panel

Power Input

Connection

TX Out (1 – 6)

Span I/O B

Span I/O A

Site I/O

RX In (1A – 6A

and 1B – 6B)

Exhaust Region

C–CCP Cage

Breakers

Combiner

Section

RGD (Needed for

Expansion only)

LPA Cage

Power

Conversion

Shelf

Breakers

Alarms

Pre–Power–up Tests – continued

May 2000 2-11

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

DC Power Pre-test (RFDS)

Before applying power to the RFDS, follow the steps in Table 2-3, while

referring to Figure 2-7, to verify there are no shorts in the RFDS DC

distribution system, backplanes, or modules/boards. As of the date of

this publication, the RFDS is not used with the –48 V BTS.

Visual inspection of card placement and equipage for each

frame vs. site documentation must be completed, as

covered in Table 2-1, on page 2-2, before proceeding with

this test.

IMPORTANT

Table 2-3: DC Power Pre-test (RFDS)

Step Action

1Physically verify that all DC/DC converters supplying the RFDS are OFF or disabled.

2Set the input power rocker switch P1 to the OFF position (see Figure 2-7).

3Verify the initial resistance from the power (+ or –) feed terminal with respect to ground terminal

measures > 5 kΩ , then slowly begins to increase.

SIf the initial reading is < 5 kΩ and remains constant, a short exists somewhere in the DC

distribution path supplied by the breaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding.

4Set the input power rocker switch P1 to the ON position.

Repeat Step 3.

Figure 2-7: DC Distribution Pre-test (COBRA RFDS Detail)

NOTE:

Set the input power switch ON while measuring the

resistance from the DC power – with respect to the

power + terminal on the rear of the COBRA RFDS.

INPUT POWER

SWITCH (P1)

FRONT OF COBRA RFDS

(cut away view shown for clarity)

RFDS REAR

INTERCONNECT PANEL

“–” CONNECTOR

“+” CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR (MADE

UP OF A HOUSING

AND TWO PINS)

FW00139

Initial Power–up Tests

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

2-12

Power-up Procedures

Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to

the BTS equipment. This test must be performed with a

second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all

rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this

test.

WARNING

DC Input Power

In the tests to follow, power will first be verified at the input to each

BTS frame. After power is verified, cards and modules within the frame

itself will be powered up and verified one at a time.

Before applying any power, verify the correct power feed and return

cables are connected between the power supply breakers and the power

connectors at the top of each BTS frame. Verify correct cable position

referring to Figure 2-3 on page 2-7 for +27 V systems and Figure 2-5 on

page 2-9 for –48 V systems.

Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap

while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage

by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal

and installation of any card/module. After removal, the

card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or

back into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.

CAUTION

For positive power applications (+27 V):

SThe positive power cable is red.

SThe negative power cable (ground) is black.

For negative power applications (–48 V):

SThe negative power cable is red or blue.

SThe positive power cable (ground) is black.

In all cases, the black power cable is at ground potential.

IMPORTANT

Motorola recommends that the DC input power cable used to connect the

frame to the main DC power source conforms to the guidelines outlined

in Table 2-4.

. . . continued on next page

Initial Power–up Tests – continued

May 2000 2-13

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 2-4: DC Input Power Cable Guidelines

Maximum Cable Length Wire Size

30.38 m (100 ft) 107 mm2 (AWG #4/0)

54.864 m (180 ft) 185 mm2 (350 kcmil)

Greater that 54.864 m (180 ft) Not recommended

*If Anderson SB350 style power connectors are used, make

sure the connector adapters are securely attached to each of

the BTS power feeds and returns. Also, make sure the

cables have been properly installed into each connector.

IMPORTANT

Common Power Supply

Verification

The procedure in Table 2-5 must be performed on any BTS frame

connected to a common power supply at the site after the common power

supply has been installed and verified per the power supply OEM

suggested procedures.

Perform the following steps to verify the power input is within

specification before powering up the individual cards/modules with the

frames themselves.

Table 2-5: Common Power Supply Verification

Step Action

1Physically verify that all DC power sources supplying the frame are OFF or disabled.

2On the RFDS (for +27 V systems only), set the input power switch P1 to the OFF position (see

Figure 2-7).

3On each frame:

SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C–CCP shelf and Linear Power

Amplifier (LPA) shelves, but leave them in their associated slots.

SSet breakers to the OFF position by pulling out C–CCP and LPA breakers (see Figure 2-3 on

page 2-7 or Figure 2-5 on page 2-9 for breaker panel layout if required).

– C–CCP shelf breakers are labeled CCCP–1, 2, 3 in the +27 V BTS and labeled POWER

1,4,5,2,6,7,3,8,9 in the –48 V BTS.

– LPA breakers are labeled 1A–1B through 4C–4D.

4Inspect input cables, verify correct input power polarity via decal on top of frame (+27 Vdc or

–48 Vdc).

5Apply power to BTS frames, one at a time, by setting the appropriate breaker in the power supply that

supplies the frame to the ON position.

6After power is applied to each frame, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply output voltages at

the top of each BTS frame are within specifications: +27.0 Vdc or –48 Vdc nominal.

Initial Power–up Tests – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

2-14

Initial Power-up (RFDS)

The procedure in Table 2-6 must be performed on the RFDS after input

power from the common power supply has been verified. Perform the

following steps to apply initial power to the cards/modules within the

frame itself, verifying that each is operating within specification.

Visual inspection of card placement and equipage for each

frame vs. site documentation must be completed, as

covered in Table 2-1, on page 2-2, before proceeding with

this test.

IMPORTANT

Table 2-6: Initial Power-up (RFDS)

Step Action

1On the RFDS, set the input power rocker switch (P1) to the ON position (see Figure 2-7).

2Verify power supply output voltages (at the top of BTS frame), using a digital voltmeter, are within

specifications: +27.0 V nominal.

Initial Power-up (BTS)

The procedure must be performed on each frame after input power from

the common power supply has been verified. Follow the steps in

Table 2-7 to apply initial power to the cards/modules within the frame

itself, verifying that each is operating within specification.

Table 2-7: Initial Power–up (BTS)

Step Action

1At the BTS, set the C–CCP (POWER) power distribution breakers (see Figure 2-3 on page 2-7 or

Figure 2-5 on page 2-9) to the ON position by pushing in the breakers.

2Insert the C–CCP fan modules. Observe that the fan modules come on line.

3! CAUTION

Verify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:

– (in +27 V BTS C–CCP shelf)

– (in –48 V BTS C–CCP shelf)

– (in –48 V BTS power conversion shelf)

Insert and lock the converter/power supplies into their associated slots one at a time.

•If no boards have been inserted, all three PWR/ALM LEDs would indicate RED to notify the user

that there is no load on the power supplies.

– If the LED is RED, do not be alarmed. After Step 4 is performed, the LEDs should turn GREEN;

if not, then a faulty converter/power supply module is indicated and should be replaced before

proceeding.

STPN 4045A

PWR CONV CDMA RCVR

STPN 4044A

PWR CONV LPA

STPN4009

PWR CONV CDMA RCVR

4Seat and lock all remaining circuit cards and modules in the C–CCP shelf into their associated slots.

. . . continued on next page

Initial Power–up Tests – continued

May 2000 2-15

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 2-7: Initial Power–up (BTS)

Step Action

5Seat the first equipped LPA module pair into the assigned slot in the upper LPA shelf including LPA

fan.

SIn +27 V systems, observe that the LPA internal fan comes on line.

6Repeat step 5 for all remaining LPAs.

7Set the LPA breakers to the ON position (per configuration) by pushing them IN one at a time. See

Figure 1-13 on page 1-28 or Figure 1-14 on page 1-29 for configurations and Figure 2-3 on page 2-7

or Figure 2-5 on page 2-9 for LPA breaker panel layout.

On +27 V frames, engage (push) LPA circuit breakers.

SConfirm LEDs on LPAs light.

On –48 V frames, engage (push) LPA PS circuit breakers.

SConfirm LPA PS fans start.

SConfirm LEDs on –48 V power converter boards light.

SConfirm LPA fans start.

SConfirm LEDs on LPAs light.

8After all cards/modules have been seated and verified, use a digital voltmeter to verify power supply

output voltages at the top of the frame remain within specifications: +27.0 Vdc or –48 Vdc nominal.

9Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for additional co–located frames (if equipped).

Initial Power–up Tests – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

2-16

Notes

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Chapter 3: Optimization/Calibration

Table of Contents

Optimization/Calibration – Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optimization Process 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell Site Types 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cell Site Data File (CDF) 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS System Software Download 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Equipage Verification 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF to BTS Connection 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the LMF 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Graphical User Interface Overview 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logical BTS 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program and Binaries Update Procedure 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Copy CDF Files from CBSC 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection 3-11. .

Folder Structure Overview 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pinging the Processors 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging into a BTS 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging Out 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download the BTS 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download the BTS – Overview 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download Code to Devices 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download Code and Data to Non–MGLI2 Devices 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select CSM Clock Source 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable CSMs 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable MCCs 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enable Redundant GLIs 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM & LFR Background 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Low Frequency Receiver/

High Stability Oscillator 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Panel LEDs 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Null Modem Cable 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM Frequency Verification 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Test Equipment Setup: GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Initialization/Verification 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LFR Initialization/Verification 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HSO Initialization/Verification 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supported Test Sets 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Reference Chart 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm-up 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Cables 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Set Calibration 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Set Calibration Background 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose of Test set Calibration 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting Test Equipment 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-50. . . . .

Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-51. .

Calibrating Test Equipment 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Cables 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and

Spectrum Analyzer 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and

Spectrum Analyzer 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Cable Loss Values 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting TX Coupler Loss Value 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When to Calibrate BLOs 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Path Calibration 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BLO Calibration Data File 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Path Calibration 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download BLO Procedure 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Audit Introduction 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmit (TX) Path Audit 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Audit Test 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All Cal/Audit Test 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Create CAL File 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Setup and Calibration 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Description 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS Parameter Settings 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM 3-74. .

Valid NAM Ranges 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set Antenna Map Data 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

RFDS Calibration 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Program TSU NAM 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Alarms Testing 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Test Overview 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm Reporting Display 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test Equipment 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDI Alarm Input Verification with Alarms Test Box 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDI Alarm Input Verification without Alarms Test Box 3-85. . . . . . . . . . .

Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Optimization/Calibration – Introduction

May 2000 3-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Introduction

This section describes procedures for downloading system operating

software, CSM reference verification/optimization, set up and calibration

of the supported test equipment, transmit/receive path verification, and

using the RFDS.

Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the

”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf

folder for any applicable information.

IMPORTANT

Optimization Process

After a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations

(power up) have been completed, the LMF is used to calibrate and

optimize the BTS. Motorola recommends that the optimization be

accomplished as follows:

1. Download MGLI2–1 with code and data and then enable MGLI2–1.

2. Use the status function and verify that all of the installed devices of

the following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX2,

GLI2, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If a device is

installed and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray in

the BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF

file will have to be corrected before the device can be accessed by

the LMF.

3. Download code and data to all devices of the following types:

– CSM

– BBX2

– GLI2 (other than MGLI2–1)

– MCC

4. Download the RFDS TSIC (if installed).

5. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.

6. Enable the following devices (in the order listed):

– Secondary CSM

– Primary CSM

– All MCCs

7. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.

8. Select the test equipment.

9. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously been

calibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for the

optimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also be

entered manually.

. . . continued on next page

Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-2

10. Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the full

optimization function. The full optimization function performs TX

calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX tests

for all selected devices.

11. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failed

paths.

12. If the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused the

failure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.

13. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passes

for a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem

that caused the failure and run the individual tests as required until

all TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.

Cell Site Types

Sites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each type

has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.

For more information on the differences in site types,

please refer to the applicable BTS/Modem Frame Hardware

Installation and Functional Hardware Description

manuals.

NOTE

Cell Site Data File (CDF)

The CDF contains information that defines the BTS and data used to

download files to the devices. A CDF file must be placed in the

applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to log into that BTS.

CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using a floppy disk. A

file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMF computer has

that capability.

The CDF includes the following information:

SDownload instructions and protocol

SSite specific equipage information

SC–CCP shelf allocation plan

– BBX2 equipage (based on cell–site type) including redundancy

– CSM equipage including redundancy

– Multi Channel Card (MCC24 or MCC8E) channel element

allocation plan. This plan indicates how the C–CCP shelf is

configured, and how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access

channel elements (and associated gain values) are assigned among

the (up to 12) MCC24s or MCC8Es in the shelf.

SCSM equipage including redundancy

. . . continued on next page

Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continued

May 2000 3-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

SEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennas

respectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of a

transmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, and

government regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, the

antenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) and

antenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the required

power at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX2 output

level required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector can

also be determined.

Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A21,

for additional information on the layout of the LMF

directory structure (including CDF file locations and

formats).

NOTE

BTS System Software

Download

BTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTS

processor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operating

code is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.

Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correct

bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files for the BTS must be

obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts–# folder in the

LMF. Failure to use the correct CDF files can cause wrong

results. Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a

live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.

IMPORTANT

The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatted

diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer has

ftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, or the LMF

Help screen, for the procedure.

Site Equipage Verification

If you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, and

review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage data

in the CDF matches the actual site hardware using a CDF conversion

table.

Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap

while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage

by ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removal

and installation of any card/module. After removal, the

card/module should be placed on a conductive surface or

back into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.

CAUTION

Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-4

Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans

At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and

place it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the 50–pin

TELCO cable connected to the BTS frame site I/O board

J1 connector until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS!

IMPORTANT

Each frame is equipped with one Site I/O and two Span I/O boards. The

Span I/O J1 connector provides connection of 25 pairs of wire. 8 pairs

are used to support up to four 4–wire span lines. 17 pairs are connected

to signal ground.

Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC must

disable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the

CDMA BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sending

control information to the CDMA BTS during LMF based tests. Refer to

Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 as required.

Table 3-1: T1/E1 Span Isolation

Step Action

1From the OMC/CBSC, disable the BTS and place it OOS. Refer to SC OMC–R/CBSC System

Operator Procedures.

– The T1/E1 span 50–pin TELCO cable connected to the BTS frame SPAN I/O board J1 connector

can be removed from both Span I/O boards, if equipped, to isolate the spans.

* IMPORTANT

Verify that you remove the SPAN cable, not the “MODEM/TELCO” connector.

Figure 3-1: Span I/O Board T1 Span Isolation

50–PIN TELCO

CONNECTORS

REMOVED

SPAN A CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

SPAN B CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

TOP OF frame

(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)

RS–232 9–PIN SUB D

CONNECTOR SERIAL

PORT FOR EXTERNAL

DIAL UP MODEM

CONNECTION (IF USED)

FW00299

. . . continued on next page

Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF – continued

May 2000 3-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

LMF to BTS Connection

The LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the left

side of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Access

door (see Figure 3-2).

Table 3-2: LMF to BTS Connection

Step Action

1To gain access to the connectors on the BTS, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart the

Velcro tape covering the BNC “T” connector (see Figure 3-2).

2Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshielded

twisted–pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DC

transformer).

NOTE

– Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernet

connection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DC

transformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.

* IMPORTANT

– The LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC

connector) must not touch the chassis during optimization.

Figure 3-2: LMF Connection Detail

NOTE:

Open LAN CABLE ACCESS

door. Pull apart Velcro tape and

gain access to the LAN A or LAN

B LMF BNC connector.

LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONS

ON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME

(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;

ETHERNET “B” COVERED

WITH VELCRO TAPE)

LMF COMPUTER

TERMINAL WITH

MOUSE PCMCIA ETHERNET

ADPATER & ETHERNET

UTP ADAPTER

10BASET/10BASE2

CONVERTER

CONNECTS

DIRECTLY TO BNC T

115 VAC POWER

CONNECTION FW00140

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11

CONNECTORS)

Preparing the LMF

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-6

Overview

Software and files for installation and updating of the LMF are provided

on CD ROM disks. The following installation items must be available:

SLMF Program on CD ROM

SLMF Binaries on CD ROM

SConfiguration Data File (CDF) for each supported BTS (on diskette or

available from the CBSC)

SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from the

CBSC)

The following section provides information and instructions for

installing and updating the LMF software and files.

Graphical User Interface

Overview

The LMF uses a graphical user interface (GUI), which works in the

following way:

SSelect the device or devices.

SSelect the action to apply to the selected device(s).

SWhile action is in progress, a status report window displays the action

taking place and other status information.

SThe status report window indicates when the the action is complete

and displays other pertinent information.

SClicking the OK button closes the status report window.

Logical BTS

The BTS software implements the logical BTS capability, also known as

virtual BTS. Previously, all BTS frames co–located at a single site had to

be identified in the network with separate and distinct BTS ID numbers.

In the Logical BTS feature, all frames located at a single BTS site are

identified with unique Frame ID numbers (Frame ID Numbers 1, 101,

201, 301) under a single (site) BTS ID number. A logical BTS can

consist of up to four SC 4812T frames.When the LMF is connected to

frame 1 of a logical BTS, you can access all devices in all of the frames

that make up the logical BTS. A logical BTS requires a CDF file that

includes equipage information for all of the logical BTS frames and their

devices and a CBSC file that includes channel data for all of the logical

BTS fames.

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF – continued

May 2000 3-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Logical BTS Numbering

The first frame of a logical BTS has a –1 suffix (e.g., BTS–812–1).

Other frames of the logical BTS are numbered with suffixes, –101, –201,

and –301 (e. g. BTS–812–201). When you log into a BTS, a FRAME

tab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame for the BTS,

there is only one tab (e.g., FRAME–282–1) for BTS–282. If a logical

BTS has more than one frame, there is a separate FRAME tab for each

frame (e.g. FRAME–438–1, FRAME–438–101, and FRAME–438–201

for a BTS–438 that has three frames). If an RFDS is included in the

CDF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS–438–1) is displayed. Figure 3-3

shows frame configurations available under the Logical BTS feature.

This figure also shows the Inter–frame spans between the different

frames at the BTS site.

Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one or

more frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen for

information on how to select devices.

C–CCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID Numbers

All cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to a

single BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbers

dependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer to

Table 3-3 and Table 3-4 for specific C–CCP Shelf Device ID numbers.

Table 3-3: C–CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)

Frame

Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)

#Power

(PS–1) Power

(PS–2) Power

(PS–3) AMR

–1 GLI2

–1 MCC2 BBX2 BBX2

–R MPC/

EMPC

–1

1 – – – 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 R1 –

101 –––101 101 101 102 103 104 105 106 101 102 103 104 105 106 R101 –

201 –––201 201 201 202 203 204 205 206 201 202 203 204 205 206 R201 –

301 –––301 301 301 302 303 304 305 306 301 302 303 304 305 306 R301 –

Table 3-4: C–CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)

Frame

Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)

#HSO/

LFR CSM

–1 CSM

–2 CCD

ACCD

BAMR

–2 GLI2–

2MCC2 BBX2 SW MPC/

EMPC

–2

1 – 1 2 – – – 2 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 – –

101 –101 102 – – – 102 102 107 108 109 110 111 112 107 108 109 110 111 112 – –

201 –201 202 – – – 202 102 207 208 209 210 211 212 207 208 209 210 211 212 – –

301 –301 302 – – – 302 102 307 308 309 310 311 312 307 308 309 310 311 312 – –

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-8

Figure 3-3: Typical Logical BTS Configurations

BTSSPAN 110

Two Frame Configuration Three Frame Configuration

Frame

1Frame

101 Frame

201

BTSSPAN 110 BTSSPAN 211

Four Frame Configuration

Frame

1Frame

101 Frame

201

BTSSPAN 110 BTSSPAN 211

Frame

301

BTSSPAN 310

Frame

1Frame

101

BTSSPAN

FW00485REF

AB AAA A

BBBAA

Preparing the LMF – continued

May 2000 3-9

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Program and Binaries Update Procedure

Follow the procedure in Table 3-5 to update the LMF program and

binaries.

First Time Installations:

– Install Java Runtime Environment (First)

– Install LMF Software (Second)

– Install BTS Binaries (Third)

– Install/Create BTS Folders (Fourth)

NOTE

If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be

available for binary updates.

NOTE

Table 3-5: CD ROM Installation

nStep Action

1Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CD ROM drive.

– If the Setup screen is displayed, follow the instructions provided.

– If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to step 2.

2Click on the Start button.

3 Select Run.

4In the Open box, enter d:\autorun and click on the OK button.

NOTE

If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.

5Follow the instructions displayed in the Setup screen.

Copy CDF Files from CBSC

Before the LMF can execute the optimization/ATP procedures for the

BTS, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files must be

obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF

notebook. This requires copying the CBSC CDF files to a DOS

formatted diskette, and using the diskette to install the CDF file in the

LMF.

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-10

Follow the procedure in Table 3-6 to obtain the CDF files from the

CBSC and copy the files to a diskette. For any further information, refer

to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part number

68P64114A21) or the LMF Help screen..

If the LMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can be used to

copy the CDF files from the CBSC.

On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can be

used in place of the cp command (e.g., unix2dos

bts–248.cdf bts–248.cdf). This should be done using a

copy of the CBSC CDF file so the original CBSC CDF file

is not changed to DOS format.

NOTE

*When copying CDF files, comply with the following to

prevent BTS login problems with the LMF:

– The numbers used in the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf

filenames must correspond to the locally assigned numbers

for each BTS and its controlling CBSC.

– The generic cbsc–1.cdf file supplied with the LMF work

with locally numbered BTS CDF files. Using this file does

not provide a valid optimization unless the generic file is

edited to replace default parameters (e.g., channel numbers)

with the operational parameters used locally.

IMPORTANT

Table 3-6: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF

nStep Action

AT THE CBSC:

1Login to the CBSC workstation.

2Insert a DOS formatted diskette in the workstation drive.

3 Type eject –q and press the <Enter> key.

4 Type mount and press the <Enter> key.

NOTE

SLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.

SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.

Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF – continued

May 2000 3-11

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-6: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF

nActionStep

5Change to the directory containing the file by typing cd <directoryname> (ex. cd bts–248) and

pressing <Enter>.

6 Type ls <Enter> to display the list of files in the directory.

7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf

files on the diskette by entering the following command:

unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename>

(e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).

NOTE

SOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases,

use the Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or

Windows text editor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF

files on the LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.

SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copied

with a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of the

command string following a space (e.g., cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/na_name)

8Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# that must be supported by the LMF.

9When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press the <Enter> key.

10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC.

AT THE LMF:

11 Start the Windows operating system.

12 Insert the diskette into the LMF.

13 Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts–# folder in the

wlmf\cdma directory for each bts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC.

14 Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the cbsc–#.cdf and bts–#.cdf files from

the diskette to the corresponding wlmf\cdma\bts–# folders created in step 13.

Creating a Named

HyperTerminal Connection for

MMI Connection

Confirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS Field

Replaceable Units (FRUs) requires establishing an MMI communication

session between the LMF and the FRU. Using features of the Windows

operating system, the connection properties for an MMI session can be

saved on the LMF computer as a named Windows HyperTerminal

connection. This eliminates the need for setting up connection

parameters each time an MMI session is required to support

optimization.

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-12

Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created on

the Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start the

connection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-7 to establish a named HyperTerminal

connection and create a WIndows desktop shortcut for it.

There are differences between Windows NT and Windows

98 in the menus and screens for creating a HyperTerminal

connection. In the following procedure, items applicable

to:

– Windows NT will be identified with Win NT

– Windows 98 will be identified with Win 98

NOTE

Table 3-7: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection

Step Action

1From the Windows Start menu, select:

Programs>Accessories

2Perform one of the following:

SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal

SFor Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click

on the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.

NOTE

SIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.

(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)

SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.

3When the Connection Description box opens:

– Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window.

– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and

– Click OK.

NOTE

For LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and a

physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.

From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS–232 port to be used

for the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 – Win NT – or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 – Win

98), and click OK.

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF – continued

May 2000 3-13

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-7: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection

Step Action

5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 port

settings as follows:

SBits per second: 9600

SData bits: 8

SParity: None

SStop bits: 1

SFlow control: None

6 Click OK.

7Save the defined connection by selecting:

File>Save

8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:

File>Exit

9 Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.

10 Perform one of the following:

SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12

SFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories

11 Perform one of the following:

SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.

SFor Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.

12 Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it

(Win 98).

13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the right

mouse button.

14 From the pop–up menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.

15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on the

Windows desktop.

Preparing the LMF – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-14

Folder Structure Overview

The LMF uses a wlmf folder that contains all of the essential data for

installing and maintaining the BTS. The list that follows outlines the

folder structure for the LMF. Except for the bts–nnn folders, these

folders are created as part of the the LMF installation. Refer to the

CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for a complete description of the folder

structure.

Figure 3-4: LMF Folder Structure

version folder (A separate folder is

required for each different version; for

example, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5)

loads

folder

(C:)

wlmf

folder

cdma

folder

code

folder

data

folder

BTS–nnn

folders (A separate folder is

required for each BTS where bts–nnn is the

unique BTS number; for example, bts–163)

Preparing the LMF – continued

May 2000 3-15

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Pinging the Processors

For proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B links

must be be verified. Figure 3-5 represents a typical BTS Ethernet

configuration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.

Ping is a program that routes request packets to the LAN network

modules to obtain a response from the specified “targeted” BTS.

CHASSIS

GROUND

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

LMF CONNECTOR

C–CCP

CAGE

OUT

BTS

(expansion)

C–CCP

CAGE

OUT

BTS

(master)

SIGNAL

GROUND

50Ω

OUT

Figure 3-5: BTS LAN Interconnect Diagram

FW00141

CHASSIS

GROUND

SIGNAL

GROUND

Follow the procedure in Table 3-8 and refer to Figure 3-6 or Figure 3-7,

as required, to ping each processor (on both LAN A and LAN B) and

verify LAN redundancy is operating correctly.

Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap

while handling any circuit card/module to prevent damage

by ESD.

CAUTION

*The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed on

each frame/enclosure before performing this test. All other

processor board LAN connections are made via the

backplanes.

IMPORTANT

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-16

Table 3-8: Pinging the Processors

nStep Action

1If you have not already done so, connect the LMF to the BTS (see Table 3-2 on page 3-5).

2From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.

3In the Open box, type ping and the MGLI IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).

NOTE

128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP address

for MGLI–2.

4Click on the OK button.

5If the connection is successful, text similar to the following is displayed:

Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255

If there is no response the following is displayed:

Request timed out

If the MGLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the MGLI still fails to

respond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link

cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the MGLI itself.

Preparing the LMF – continued

May 2000 3-17

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

OUT

LAN

GPS

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR/

ALARM B 4

GND

TX OUT

FRONT

REAR

ETHERNET CONNECTORS

WITH 50–OHM TERMINATORS

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC

HSO

Figure 3-6: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate

ALARM A

FW00081

EXP I/O

RGD

TOP VIEW

Preparing the LMF – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-18

Figure 3-7: –48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate

OUT

LAN

GPS

SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B

LFR

ALARM B 4

GND

TX OUT

SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B

CAUTION

LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS –48 VDC

HSO/

ALARM A

EXP I/O

RGD

FRONT

REAR

FW00479

SITE I/O

REF

ETHERNET CONNECTORS

WITH 50–OHM TERMINATORS

Preparing the LMF – continued

May 2000 3-19

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Logging into a BTS

Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS

and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into one or more BTS’s at a

time, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.

Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf file is

used for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are

provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the

correct CDF files can result in wrong results. Failure to

use the correct CDF files to log into a live (traffic

carrying) site can shut down the site.

IMPORTANT

Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the LMF is properly

connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-2). Follow the procedure in

Table 3-9 to log into a BTS.

Prerequisites

Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been

completed:

SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF file and CBSC file exists.

SThe LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computer

was connected to the BTS before starting the Windows operating

system and LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after

connecting it to the BTS (see Table 3-2 and Figure 3-2).

Table 3-9: BTS Login Procedure

nStep Action

1Click on the Login tab (if not displayed).

2If no base stations can be seen, double click on CDMA (in the Available base Stations pick list).

3Click on the desired BTS number.

4Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).

5Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IP

Address box.

NOTE

128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP

address for MGLI–2.

6Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.

7Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list), normally

MPC, corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.

8Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.

. . . continued on next page

Preparing the LMF – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-20

Table 3-9: BTS Login Procedure

nActionStep

9Click on Login.

A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.

NOTE

SIf you attempt to login to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.

SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a logout due to a system error (i.e., a device

failure).

SIf the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with code before other devices can be

seen.

Logging Out

Follow the procedure in Table 3-10 to logout of a BTS.

Prerequisites

SThe LMF is logged into the BTS.

Table 3-10: Logout Procedure

nStep Action

1Click on the Select menu.

2Click on Logout from the Select menu list.

A Confirm Logout pop–up message appears.

3Click on Yes (or press the <Enter> key) to confirm logout and return to the Login tab.

NOTE

The Select menu will only logout of the displayed BTS. You may also logout of all BTS login

sessions and exit the LMF by using the File>Exit menu item.

Download the BTS

May 2000 3-21

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Download the BTS – Overview

Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device

initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during

manufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and data

must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS

can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.

ROM Code

Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine

maintenance nor a normal part of the optimization process. It is only

done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the device

does not match the release level of the site operating software (e.g.,

Release 8.x ROM code and Release 9.x software) AND the CBSC cannot

communicate with the BTS to perform the download. If you must

download ROM code, refer to Appendix H.

Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM

code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.

ROM code must be manually selected for download.

RAM Code

Before RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct

RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM

code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device

menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored

in the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file is selected

automatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder

(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code). The RAM

code file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.

RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download is started, the device being downloaded changes to OOS-ROM

(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device

changes to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI,

the LMF automatically also downloads data, and then enables the MGLI.

When enabled, the MGLI changes to INS (green).

For non–MGLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is

downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM

(yellow).

Download the BTS – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-22

Download Code to Devices

Code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download starts, the device being downloaded changes to

OOS_ROM (blue). If the download is completed successfully, the device

changes to OOS_RAM with code loaded (yellow). Prior to downloading

a device, a code file must exist. The code file is selected automatically if

the code file is in the /lmf/cdma/n.n.n.n/code folder (where n.n.n.n is the

version number of the download code that matches the “NextLoad”

parameter in the CDF file). The code file in the code folder must have

the correct hardware bin number. Code can be automatically or manually

selected.

The following are the devices to be downloaded:

SSpan Configuration

– Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2)

– Slave Group Line Interface (SGLI2)

SClock Synchronization Module (CSM)

SMulti Channel Card (MCC24 or MCC8E)

SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2)

STest Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) – if RFDS is installed

The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with code and

data, and put INS before downloading any other device.

The download code process for an MGLI automatically

downloads data and enables the MGLI before downloading

other devices. The other devices can be downloaded in any

order.

IMPORTANT

Follow the procedure in Table 3-11 to download the firmware

application code for the MGLI2. The download code action downloads

data and also enables the MGLI2.

Prerequisite

Prior to performing this procedure, ensure a code file exists for each of

the devices to be downloaded.

. . . continued on next page

Download the BTS – continued

May 2000 3-23

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

R9 RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a device that

has R8 ROM code and R8 RAM code must NOT be

downloaded to a device that has R9 ROM code. All

devices in a BTS must have the same R–level ROM and

RAM code before the optimization and ATP procedures

can be performed. If a newly installed R8 BTS is to be

upgraded to R9, the optimization and ATPs should be

accomplished with the R8 code. Then the site should be

upgraded to R9 by the CBSC. The optimization and ATP

procedures do not have to be performed again after the R9

upgrade. If a replacement R8 device needs to be used in a

R9 BTS, the device ROM code can be changed with use of

the LMF before the optimization and ATPs are performed

for the BTS. Refer to the Download ROM Code section. A

R9 device can not be converted back to a R8 device in the

field without Motorola assistance.

WARNING

Table 3-11: Download and Enable MGLI2

nStep Action

1 Select Util>Tools>Update Next Load function to ensure the Next Load parameter is set to the

correct code version level.

2Download code to the primary MGLI2 by clicking on the MGLI2.

– From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.

A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.

– Click OK to close the status window. (The MGLI2 should automatically be downloaded with

data and enabled.)

3Download code and data to the redundant MGLI2 but do not enable at this time.

Download the BTS – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-24

Download Code and Data to

Non–MGLI2 Devices

Non–MGLI2 devices can be downloaded individually or all equipped

devices can be downloaded with one action. Follow the procedure in

Table 3-12 to download code and data to the non–MGLI2 devices.

When downloading multiple devices, the download may

fail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). These

devices can be downloaded separately after completing the

multiple download.

NOTE

Table 3-12: Download Code and Data to Non–MGLI Devices

nStep Action

1Select all devices to be downloaded.

2From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.

A status report displays the result of the download for each selected device.

Click OK to close the status window.

NOTE

After the download has started, the device being downloaded changes to blue. If the download is

completed successfully, the device changes to yellow (OOS-RAM with code loaded).

After a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded with code and has changed to

OOS-RAM, the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.

3To download the firmware application data to each device, select the target device and select:

Device>Download Data

Select CSM Clock Source

A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Clock Source

function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three

inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to

be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock

source options:

SLocal GPS

SRemote GPS

SHSO (only for sources 2 & 3)

SLFR (only for sources 2 & 3)

S10 MHz (only for sources 2 & 3)

SNONE (only for sources 2 & 3)

Prerequisites

MGLI=INS_ACT

CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACT

. . . continued on next page

Download the BTS – continued

May 2000 3-25

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Follow the procedure in Table 3-13 to select a CSM Clock Source.

Table 3-13: Select CSM Clock Source

Step Action

1Select the applicable CSM(s).

2Click on the Device menu.

3Click on the Clock Source menu item.

4Click on the Select menu item.

A clock source selection window is displayed.

5Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists.

Uncheck the related check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.

6Click on the OK button.

A status report window displays the results of the selection action.

7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

Enable CSMs

Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical

operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop

(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an

on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).

The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. The GPS receiver

(mounted on CSM 1) is the primary timing reference and synchronizes

the entire cellular system. CSM 2 provides redundancy but does not have

a GPS receiver.

The BTS may be equipped with a remote GPS, LORAN–C Low

Frequency Receiver (LFR), or HSO 10 MHz Rubidium source, which

the CSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In all cases, the CSM

monitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.

– CSMs are code loaded at the factory. This data is

retained in EEPROM. The download code procedure

is required in the event it becomes necessary to code

load CSMs with updated software versions. Use the

status function to determine the current code load

versions.

– For n0n–RGPS sites only, verify the CSM configured

with the GPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in

the CSM–1 slot before continuing.

– The CSM(s) and MCC(s) to be enabled must have

been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM)

and data.

IMPORTANT

. . . continued on next page

Download the BTS – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-26

Follow the procedure in Table 3-14 to enable the CSMs.

Table 3-14: Enable CSMs

nStep Action

1Verify the CSM(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.

2Click on the target CSM.

From the Device pull down, select Enable.

NOTE

If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM-2 first and then CSM–1.

A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.

Click OK to close the status window.

NOTE

FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in

the Description field, the CSM changes to the enabled state after phase lock is achieved. CSM 1

houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour to complete.

* IMPORTANT

The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and

operated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters

satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS

contains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.

If an installed GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to one

hour for the GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.

Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D position

fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in-service. (In some cases, the GPS

receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load.)

3NOTE

If equipped with two CSMs, the LMF should display CSM-1 as bright GREEN (INS–ACT) and

CSM-2 as dark green (INS–STB). After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, the

PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green (alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).

If more than an hour has passed, refer to Table 3-18 and Table 3-19 to determine the cause.

Download the BTS – continued

May 2000 3-27

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Enable MCCs

This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”

parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,

but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the

BTS (approximately 3 ms).

Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to enable the MCCs.

The MGLI2, and primary CSM must be downloaded and

enabled (IN–SERVICE ACTIVE), before downloading and

enabling the MCC.

IMPORTANT

Table 3-15: Enable MCCs

nStep Action

1Verify the MCC(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.

2Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pulldown menu choose All MCCs.

3From the Device menu, select Enable

A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.

4Click on OK to close the status report window.

Enable Redundant GLIs

Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to enable the redundant GLI(s).

Table 3-16: Enable Redundant GLIs

nStep Action

1Select the target redundant GLI(s).

2From the Device menu, select Enable.

A status report window confirms the change in the device(s) status and the enabled GLI(s) is

green.

3Click on OK to close the status report window.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-28

CSM & LFR Background

The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)

boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in

slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. The

CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remote

GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna head

that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughter

card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF–GPS signal.

The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1

and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution

Cards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608

MHz clocks. CCD 1 is married to CSM 1 and CCD 2 is married to

CSM 2. A failure on CSM 1 or CCD 1 cause the system to switch to

redundant CSM 2 and CCD 2.

In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked

Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by

either an on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver

(R–GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. DPLL

circuits employed by the CSM provide switching between the primary

and redundant unit upon request. Synchronization between the primary

and redundant CSM cards, as well as the LFR or HSO back–up source,

provides excellent reliability and performance.

Each CSM board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides

19.6608 MHz clock, even second tick reference, and 3 MHz sinewave

reference, referenced to the selected synchronization source (GPS,

LORAN–C Frequency Receiver (LFR), or High Stability Oscillator

(HSO), T1 Span, or external reference oscillator sources). The 3 MHz

signals are also routed to the RDM EXP 1A & 1B connectors on the top

interconnect panel for distribution to co–located frames at the site.

Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS

synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of

a GPS receiver failure on CSM 1. During normal operation, the CSM 1

board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-18). The source

selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.

All boards are mounted in the C–CCP shelf at the top of the BTS frame.

Figure 3-9 on page 3-31 illustrates the location of the boards in the BTS

frame. The diagram also shows the CSM front panel.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

May 2000 3-29

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Low Frequency Receiver/

High Stability Oscillator

The CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoring

functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is

capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS

reference signal.

The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RF

signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is

synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The

LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPS lock.

The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary

interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those

geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the

HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained

for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.

Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX

LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the

expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical

frames require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has

an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame

and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and

LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-17).

HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection

(see Table 3-17).

Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for

60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM

board warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and

oscillator frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test

equipment warm-up allows the Rubidium standard

timebase to stabilize in frequency before any measurements

are made.

NOTE

Front Panel LEDs

The status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:

SSteady Green – Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).

SRapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR

(STBY).

SFlashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSM OOS–RAM attempting

to lock on GPS signal.

SRapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. Trouble

Notifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-30

Null Modem Cable

A null modem cable is required. It is connected between the LMF

COM1 port and the RS232–GPIB Interface box. Figure 3-8 shows the

wiring detail for the null modem cable.

Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

GND

RTS

CTS

RSD/DCD

DTR

ON BOTH CONNECTORS

SHORT PINS 7, 8;

SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6

9–PIN D–FEMALE 9–PIN D–FEMALE

DSR DSR

FW00362

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SThe LMF is NOT logged into the BTS.

SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via

a null modem board.

CSM Frequency Verification

The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the Clock

Synchronization Module (CSM) boards before performing the rf path

verification tests. Parts of this procedure will be repeated for final

verification after the overall optimization has been completed.

Test Equipment Setup: GPS &

LFR/HSO Verification

Follow the procedure in Table 3-17 to set up test equipment while

referring to Figure 3-9 as required.

Table 3-17: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Step Action

1Perform one of the following operations:

– For local GPS (RF–GPS), verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM

slot 1 and that CSM–1 is INS.

NOTE

This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.

– For Remote GPS (RGPS)Verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM–1 is

INS

NOTE

This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132CC (or subsequent).

2Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem

board) to the MMI port on CSM–1.

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

May 2000 3-31

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-17: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)

Step Action

3Reinstall CSM–2.

4Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see

Table 3-7)

NOTE

The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COMM1 is being

used for the MMI session.

5When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.

Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connection

NULL MODEM

BOARD

(TRN9666A)

RS–232 SERIAL

MODEM CABLE

DB9–TO–DB25

ADAPTER

COM1

LMF

NOTEBOOK

FW00372

CSM board shown

removed from frame

19.6 MHZ TEST

POINT REFERENCE

(NOTE 1)

EVEN SECOND

TICK TEST POINT

REFERENCE

GPS RECEIVER

ANTENNA INPUT

GPS RECEIVER

MMI SERIAL

PORT

ANTENNA COAX

CABLE

REFERENCE

OSCILLATOR

9–PIN TO 9–PIN

RS–232 CABLE

NOTES:

1. One LED on each CSM:

Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE

Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM

Red = Fault Condition

Flashing Green & Red = Fault

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-32

GPS Initialization/Verification

Follow the procedure in Table 3-18 to initialize and verify proper GPS

receiver operation.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.

SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via

a null modem board (see Figure 3-9).

SThe primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) have been warmed up for at

least 15 minutes.

SConnect the GPS antenna to the GPS RF connector

ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver

can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected

to any other RF connector.

CAUTION

Table 3-18: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and

GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI

command

bstatus

– Observe the following typical response:

CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.

BDC_MAP:000, This CSM’s BDC Map:0000

Clock Alarms (0000):

DPLL is locked and has a reference source.

GPS receiver self test result: passed

Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11

2HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.

If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in

the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit

csm csmgen refsrc command.

* IMPORTANT

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:

– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator

temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !

– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator

is defective

– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

May 2000 3-33

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-18: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

3Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):

– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.

– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.

4Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.

gstatus

– Observe the following typical response:

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.

24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.

24:06:08

24:06:08 Recent Change Data:

24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.

24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)

24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.

24:06:08

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:

24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm

24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm

(GPS)

24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.

24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.

24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08

24:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa8

24:06:08

24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:

24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P

24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8

24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8

24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996

24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115

24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _

24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769

24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07

24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB

24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.

5Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):

– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.

– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!

– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.

Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference

to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-34

Table 3-18: GPS Initialization/Verification

Step Action

6If steps 1 through 5 pass, the GPS is good.

* IMPORTANT

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:

– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and

visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has

been entered into CDF file).

– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be

accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.

– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.

– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the

shield.

– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame

GPS input.

– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.

7Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS

acquisition has taken place.

debug dpllp

Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of

power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 8)

CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.

DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.

DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.

NOTE

The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the

reference oscillator will be unstable.

8Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.

c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175

c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175

c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175

c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175

9Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):

– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).

– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).

– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.

10 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.

debug dpllp

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

May 2000 3-35

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

LFR Initialization/Verification The Low Frequency LORAN–C Receiver (LFR) is a full size card that

resides in the C–CCP Shelf. The LFR is a completely self-contained unit

that interfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM

handles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of the

LFR.

The LFR receives a 100 kHz, 35 kHz BW signal from up to 40 stations

(8 chains) simultaneously and provides the following major functions:

SAutomatic antenna pre-amplifier calibration (using a second

differential pair between LFR and LFR antenna)

SA 1 second ±200 ηs strobe to the CSM

If the BTS is equipped with an LFR, follow the procedure in Table 3-19

to initialize the LFR and verify proper operation as a backup source for

the GPS.

If CSMRefSrc2 = 2 in the CDF file, the BTS is equipped

with an LFR. If CSMRefSrc2 = 18, the BTS is equipped

with an HSO.

NOTE

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-36

Table 3-19: LFR Initialization/Verification

Step Action Note

1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in tracking

mode. A typical response is:

mode

typical

response

is:

CSM> lstatus <cr>

LFR St ti St t

LFR Station Status:

Clock coherence: 512 >

5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:

5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N Flag:

5990 47/55 dB –6 S/N Flag:

7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Fl

This must be greater

than 100 before LFR

becomes a valid source.

7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:

7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >

7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N Flag:

7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N Flag:E

7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:

8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag

This shows the LFR is

locked to the selected

PLL station.

8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:

8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:

8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:

8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:

8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:

8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:

8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Fl

ag:

8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:

8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:

9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Fl

9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:

9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:

9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Fla

9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E

9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N Flag:E

9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N Flag:E

9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:

9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N Flag:S

9940W 49/56 dB –4 S/N Flag:E

9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E

9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N Flag:E

9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:

9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:

9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Fl

ag:

9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N Flag:

9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:

9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl

9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:

LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W

LFR Recent Change Data:

Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >

PLL GRI: 7980W

LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.

CSM>

This search list and PLL

data must match the

configuration for the

geographical location

of the cell site.

. . . continued on next page

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

May 2000 3-37

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-19: LFR Initialization/Verification

Step NoteAction

2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):

– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).

– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z

assignment.

– Verify the signal to noise (S/N) ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.

3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.

– Observe the following typical response.

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good –3 0 Yes

1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes

2 Not used

Current reference source number: 1

4LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source

(verified from left to right).

* IMPORTANT

If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:

– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.

– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m

(300 ft) in length.

– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.

– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .

NOTE

LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the

underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.

5Close the Hyperterminal window.

CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-38

HSO Initialization/Verification

The HSO module is a full–size card that resides in the C–CCP Shelf.

This completely self contained high stability 10 MHz oscillator

interfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM

handles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of the

HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO is capable of maintaining

synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for a

limited time.

The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not covered

by the LORAN–C system and provides the following major functions:

SReference oscillator temperature and phase lock monitor circuitry

SGenerates a highly stable 10 MHz sine wave.

SReference divider circuitry converts 10 MHz sine wave to 10 MHz

TTL signal, which is divided to provide a 1 PPS strobe to the CSM.

Prerequisites

SThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.

SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via

a null modem board.

SThe primary CSM and the HSO (if equipped) have warmed up for 15

minutes.

If the BTS is equipped with an HSO, follow the procedure in Table 3-20

to configure the HSO.

Table 3-20: HSO Initialization/Verification

Step Action

1At the BTS, slide the HSO card into the cage.

NOTE

The LED on the HSO should light red for no longer than 15-minutes, then switch to green. The CSM

must be locked to GPS.

2On the LMF at the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.

– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:

Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid

0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 0 0 Yes

1 HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxx –69532 Yes

2 Not used

Current reference source number: 0

When the CSM is locked to GPS, verify that the HSO “Good” field is Yes and the “Valid” field is Yes.

3If source “1” is not configured as HSO, enter at the CSM> prompt: ss 1 12 <cr>

Check for Good in the Status field.

4At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.

Verify the HSO valid field is Yes. If not, repeat this step until the “Valid” status of Yes is returned. The

HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO Rubidium

oscillator is fully warmed.

Test Equipment Setup

May 2000 3-39

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Connecting Test Equipment to

the BTS

All test equipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus.

The LMF requires each piece of test equipment to have a factory set

GPIB address. If there is a communications problem between the LMF

and any piece of test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have

been set correctly (normally 13 for a power meter and 18 for a CDMA

analyzer).

The following equipment is required to perform optimization:

SLMF

STest set

SDirectional coupler and attenuator

SRF cables and connectors

Refer to Table 3-21 for an overview of connections for test equipment

currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the following figures:

SFigure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the test set connections for TX

calibration.

SFigure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the test set connections for

optimization/ATP tests.

SFigure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show typical TX and RX ATP setup with

a directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).

Supported Test Sets

Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using one of the

following test sets:

SCyberTest

SAdvantest R3465 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

SHewlett–Packard HP 8935

SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface for

1.7/1.9 GHz) and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter

SSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optional

SRubidium Standard Timebase – optional

To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test

connections must be through the directional coupler and

in-line attenuator as shown in the test setup illustrations.

CAUTION

Test Equipment Set–up – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-40

Test Equipment Reference

Chart

Table 3-21 depicts the current test equipment available meeting Motorola

standards.

To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presently

being used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.

Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to

that port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),

reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.

Table 3-21: Test Equipment Setup

TEST SETS ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT

SIGNAL Cyber–

Test Ad-

vantest HP

8935 HP

8921A

8921

W/PCS Power

Meter

GPIB

Inter-

face LMF Directional

Coupler & Pad* BTS

EVEN SECOND

SYNCHRONIZATION EVEN

SEC REF EVEN SEC

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

EVEN

SECOND

SYNC IN

19.6608 MHZ

CLOCK TIME

BASE IN

CDMA

TIME BASE

IN EXT

REF IN

CDMA

TIME BASE

CDMA

TIME BASE

CONTROL

IEEE 488 BUS IEEE

488 GPIB HP–IB HP–IB GPIB SERIAL

PORT

HP–IB HP–IB

TX TEST

CABLES RF

IN/OUT INPUT

50–OHM RF

IN/OUT TX1–6

IN/OUT RF

IN/OUT 20 DB

PAD BTS

PORT

RX TEST

CABLES RF GEN

OUT RF OUT

50–OHM DUPLEX RX1–6

DUPLEX

OUT RF OUT

ONLY

SYNC

MONITOR

FREQ

MONITOR

Test Equipment Set–up – continued

May 2000 3-41

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Equipment Warm-up

Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes

prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This

assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization

accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,

hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as

warm-up time.)

IMPORTANT

Calibrating Cables

Figure 3-10 shows the cable calibration setup for various supported test

sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input and

output ports of each test set, and the right side details the set up for each

test.

Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS

TX OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBX

channels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC

place the antenna (sector) assigned to the LPA under test

OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury

and/or equipment damage.

WARNING

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Set–up – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-42

Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test Setup

Motorola CyberTest

Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935

Advantest Model R3465

DUPLEX

OUT

RF OUT

50–OHM

INPUT

50–OHM

RF GEN OUTANT IN

ANT

SUPPORTED TEST SETS

100–WATT (MIN)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

SET

A. SHORT CABLE CAL

SHORT

CABLE

B. RX TEST SETUP

TEST

SET

C. TX TEST SETUP

20 DB PAD

FOR 1.9 GHZ

CALIBRATION SET UP

N–N FEMALE

ADAPTER

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the

Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected

directly to the Cybertest Test Set.

A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test

cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test

Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable

calibration procedure, not with the test cables for

TX calibration and ATP tests.

TEST

SET

CABLE

SHORT

CABLE

FW00089

Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot

be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.

Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A

DIRECTIONAL COUPLER

(30 DB)

N–N FEMALE

ADAPTER

Test Equipment Set–up – continued

May 2000 3-43

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Setup for TX Calibration

Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the test set connections for TX

calibration.

Motorola CyberTest

Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

FRONT PANEL RF

IN/OUT

RF IN/OUT

HP–IB

TO GPIB

BOX

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

CONTROL

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232

NULL

MODEM

CABLE

OUT

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS

G MODE

TEST SET

INPUT/

OUTPUT

PORTS

BTS

100–WATT (MIN)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

2O DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TX TEST

CABLE

TX ANTENNA

PORT OR TX

RFDS

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLERS

POWER

METER

(OPTIONAL)*

NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE

CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY

TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.

Advantest Model R3465

INPUT

50–OHM

GPIB

CONNECTS TO

BACK OF UNIT

* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE

OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX

CALIBRATION/AUDIT

POWER

SENSOR

Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest)

REF FW00094

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

Test Equipment Set–up – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-44

Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A W/PCS for 1.7/1.9 GHz

Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface

POWER METER

TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232

NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

WITH UNUSED

PORT TERMINATED

100–WATT (MIN)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

TEST

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

2O DB PAD

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TX ANTENNA

GROUP OR TX

RFDS

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLERS

Note: The HP 8921A cannot be used for TX

calibration. A power meter must be used.

TEST

CABLE

POWER

SENSOR

FW00095

Test Equipment Set–up – continued

May 2000 3-45

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Setup for Optimization/ATP

Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the test set connections for

optimization/ATP tests.

Motorola CyberTest

Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935

DUPLEX OUT

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

IN/OUT

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

RF IN/OUT

HP–IB

TO GPIB

BOX

Advantest Model R3465

INPUT

50–OHM

GPIB CONNECTS

TO BACK OF UNIT

NOTE: The Directional Coupler is not used

with the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is

connected directly to the Cybertest Test set.

RF OUT

RX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

RX ANTENNA

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

TX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

RX ANTENNA

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

TEST

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

TEST SET

INPUT/

OUTPUT

PORTS

OUT

NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX

TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED

ANTENNA GROUP.

100–WATT (MIN)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

2O DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

EVEN

SECOND/SYNC

IN (BNC “T”

WITH 50 OHM

TERMINATOR)

CDMA

TIMEBASE

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

REF FW00096

Figure 3-13: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

OUT

Test Equipment Set–up – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-46

RF OUT

ONLY

Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface

(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)

HP PCS

INTERFACE*

GPIB

CONNECTS

TO BACK OF

UNITS

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP

RX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

RX ANTENNA

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

TX ANTENNA

PORT OR RFDS

RX ANTENNA

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

RS232–GPIB

INTERFACE BOX

INTERNAL PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD

GPIB

CABLE

UNIVERSAL TWISTED

PAIR (UTP) CABLE

(RJ45 CONNECTORS)

RS232 NULL

MODEM

CABLE

S MODE

DATA FORMAT

BAUD RATE

GPIB ADRS G MODE

BTS

TEST

CABLE

CDMA

LMF

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

10BASET/

10BASE2

CONVERTER

LAN

TEST

CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

IEEE 488

GPIB BUS

TEST SET

INPUT/

OUTPUT

PORTS

OUT

NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE

DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX

TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED

ANTENNA GROUP.

100–WATT (MIN)

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

2O DB PAD

(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)

EVEN

SECOND/SYNC

IN (BNC “T”

WITH 50 OHM

TERMINATOR)

CDMA

TIMEBASE

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

CSM

IN/OUT

Figure 3-14: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A

REF FW00097

GPIB

CONNECTS

TO BACK OF

UNIT

SYNC MONITOR

EVEN SEC TICK

PULSE REFERENCE

FROM CSM BOARD

FREQ MONITOR

19.6608 MHZ CLOCK

REFERENCE FROM

CSM BOARD

Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A

(for 800 MHz)

* FOR 1700 AND

1900 MHZ ONLY

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

IN/OUT

RF OUT

ONLY

Test Equipment Set–up – continued

May 2000 3-47

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 3-15: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS)

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

40W NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

OUTPUT

PORT

RVS (REFLECTED)

PORT 50–OHM

TERMINATION

FWD

(INCIDENT)

PORT

BTS INPUT

PORT TX TEST

CABLE

ONE 20 DB 20 W IN LINE

ATTENUATOR

Connect TX test cable between

the directional coupler input port

and the appropriate TX antenna

directional coupler connector.

TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS

RFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLER

OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)

ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORS

(RFM TX)

(RFM RX)

COBRA RFDS Detail

RF FEED LINE TO

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

REMOVED

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

Appropriate test sets and the port

names for all model test sets are

described in Table 3-21.

TEST

CABLE

TX RF FROM BTS FRAME

TEST

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

NOTE:

THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH

STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES. FW00116

Test Equipment Set–up – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-48

Figure 3-16: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS)

RX RF FROM BTS

FRAME

Connect RX test cable between

the test set and the appropriate

RX antenna directional coupler.

RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS

RF FEED LINE TO

TX ANTENNA

REMOVED

COMMUNICATIONS

TEST SET

RFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLER

OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)

ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORS

(RFM TX)

(RFM RX)

COBRA RFDS Detail

OUT

Appropriate test sets and the port

names for all model test sets are

described in Table 3-21.

RX Test

Cable

NOTE:

THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH

STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.

FW00115

Test Set Calibration

May 2000 3-49

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Test Set Calibration

Background

Proper test equipment calibration ensures that the test equipment and

associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that

measurements are correct.

If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been

calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not

need to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,

communications test set, additional test equipment,

associated test cables, and adapters.)

NOTE

This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.

Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and

adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has

been calibrated and maintained as a set.

If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,

that makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been

replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so

can introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect

measurements and degradation to system performance.

CAUTION

Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent

test equipment) must be performed at the site before

calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment

after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a

minimum of 60 minutes.

IMPORTANT

Purpose of Test set

Calibration

These procedures access the LMF automated calibration routine used to

determine the path losses of the supported communications analyzer,

power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna switch that

make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the gain/loss

offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the LMF.

Test Set Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-50

Selecting Test Equipment

Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment

automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.

A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for

test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the

test equipment items are connected directly to the LMF computer via a

GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab is used when

the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a network connection.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.

SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to

the GPIB box.

Manually Selecting Test

Equipment in a Serial

Connection Tab

Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test

equipment is connected. The LMF does not check to see if the test

equipment is actually detected for manual specification. Follow the

procedure in Table 3-22 to select test equipment manually.

Table 3-22: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab

nStep Action

1From the Options menu, select LMF Options.

The LMF Options window appears.

2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).

3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).

4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).

5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.

6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box.

Recommended Addresses

13=Power Meter

18=CDMA Analyzer

7Click on Apply. (The button darkens until the selection has been committed.)

NOTE

With manual selection, the LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and

communicating with the LMF.

8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.

Test Set Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-51

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Automatically Selecting Test

Equipment in a Serial

Connection Tab When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMF

examines which test equipment items are actually communicating with

the LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-23 to use the auto-detect

feature.

Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect

nStep Action

1From the Options menu, select LMF Options.

The LMF Options window appears.

2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).

3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).

4Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).

5Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).

NOTE

When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to

search box is used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a power

meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 13,18 is included in

the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) is used for RF power measurements. If

the test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter

is not selected.

6Click on Apply.

NOTE

The button darkens until the selection has been committed. A check mark appears in the Manual

Configuration section for detected test equipment items.

7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.

Test Set Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-52

Calibrating Test Equipment

The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level

of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.

If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power

meter is zeroed.

Use the Calibrate Test Equipment menu item from the Util menu to

calibrate test equipment. The test equipment must be selected before

calibration can begin. Follow the procedure in Table 3-24 to calibrate the

test equipment.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for tests

that are to be run.

STest equipment has been selected.

Table 3-24: Test Equipment Calibration

nStep Action

1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment.

A Directions window is displayed.

2Follow the directions provided.

3Click on Continue to close the Directions window.

A status report window is displayed.

4Click on OK to close the status report window.

Calibrating Cables

The cable calibration function measures the loss (in dB) for the TX and

RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is used to

measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable configuration and

RX cable configuration). The cable calibration consists of the following:

SMeasuring the loss of a short cable – This is required to compensate

for any measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable (used only

for the calibration process) is used in series with both the TX and RX

cable configuration when measuring. The measured loss of the short

cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX cable

configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX cable

configurations. The result is then adjusted out of both the TX and RX

measurements to compensate for the measured loss.

SThe short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss is measured –

The RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable

with type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX

port of the test equipment.

. . . continued on next page

Test Set Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-53

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

SThe short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is measured –

The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with

type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional

attenuator (if required by the specified BTS). The total loss of the path

loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS

(normally 30 or 50 dB).

Calibrating Cables with a

CDMA Analyzer

Cable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-10

illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup. Appendix F covers

the procedures for manual cable calibration.

LMF cable calibration for PCS systems (1.7/1.9 GHz)

cannot be accomplished using an HP8921 analyzer with

PCS interface or an Advantest analyzer. A different

analyzer type or the signal generator and spectrum analyzer

method must be used (refer to Table 3-26 and Figure 3-17).

Cable calibration values are then manually entered.

NOTE

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable

calibration.

STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.

Table 3-25: Cable Calibration

nStep Action

1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration.

A Cable Calibration window is displayed.

2Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box.

NOTE

Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two

or more channels numbers are entered, the cables are calibrated for each channel. Interpolation is

accomplished for other channels as required for TX calibration.

3 Select TX and RX Cable Cal, TX Cable Cal, or RX Cable Cal in the Cable Calibration pick

list.

4 Click OK. Follow the direction displayed for each step.

A status report window displays the results of the cable calibration.

Test Set Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-54

Calibrating TX Cables Using a

Signal Generator and

Spectrum Analyzer Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the TX cables using a

signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-17 for a

diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.

Table 3-26: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

nStep Action

1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.

2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of:

– 869–894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA

– 1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS.

– 1840–1870 MHz for KoreaN PCS

3Use a spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-17, A) and record the

value.

4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of the

diagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of:

– 869–894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA

– 1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS.

– 1840–1870 MHz for Korean PCS

Record the value at point B.

5Calibration factor = A – B

Example: Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB

NOTE

The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is

completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures

use the correct calibration factor.

Test Set Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-55

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 3-17: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests

(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)

50 OHM

TERMINATION

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal

Generator

Spectrum

Analyzer

40W NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

SHORT TEST CABLE

Signal

Generator

THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE HP8481A POWER

SENSOR DURING TX BAY LEVEL OFFSET TEST AND TO THE

PCS INTERFACE BOX INPUT PORT DURING TX ATP TESTS.

SHORT

TEST

CABLE

THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO

THE TX PORTS DURING TX BAY LEVEL

OFFSET TEST AND TX ATP TESTS.

CABLE FROM 20 DB @ 20W ATTENUATOR TO THE

PCS INTERFACE OR THE HP8481A POWER SENSOR.

ONE 20DB 20 W IN

LINE ATTENUATOR

FW00293

Calibrating RX Cables Using a

Signal Generator and

Spectrum Analyzer Follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the RX cables using the

signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-18, if required.

Table 3-27: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

nStep Action

1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal

Generator.

2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of:

– 824–849 for 800 MHz CDMA

– 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS

– 1750–1780 MHz for Korean PCS

3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-18, A) and record the

value for A.

4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram to measure the output at the

customer’s RX frequency of:

– 824–849 for 800 MHz CDMA

– 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS

– 1750–1780 MHz for Korean PCS

Record the value at point B.

. . . continued on next page

Test Set Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-56

Table 3-27: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

nActionStep

5Calibration factor = A – B

Example: Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dB

NOTE

The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final

test setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup,

as is, to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.

Figure 3-18: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test

(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)

Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal

Generator

Spectrum

Analyzer

SHORT

TEST

CABLE

SHORT TEST

CABLE

CONNECTION TO THE HP PCS

INTERFACE OUTPUT PORT

DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.

Signal

Generator

BULLET

CONNECTOR

LONG

CABLE 2

CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS

DURING RX MEASUREMENTS. FW00294

Test Set Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-57

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are

normally set by accomplishing cable calibration using the applicable test

equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable loss files. The

cable loss values can also be set/changed manually. Follow the procedure

in Table 3-28 to set cable loss values.

Prerequisites

SLogged into the BTS

Table 3-28: Setting Cable Loss Values

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit>Cable Loss>TX or RX.

A data entry pop–up window appears.

3To add a new channel number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the Channel # and Loss

(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.

4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.

6To save displayed values, click on the Save button.

7To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button.

Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.

NOTE

SIf cable loss values exist for two different channels, the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.

SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.

Test Set Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-58

Setting TX Coupler Loss Value If an in–service TX coupler is installed, the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)

must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX

calibration and audit calculations. Follow the procedure in Table 3-29 to

set TX coupler loss values.

Prerequisites

SLogged into the BTS.

Table 3-29: Setting TX Coupler Loss Value

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit>TX Coupler Loss. A data entry pop–up window appears.

3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.

4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

5Click on the Save button to save displayed values.

6Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.

Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.

NOTE

SThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Options>LMF Options>BTS Options tab must

checked before entered TX coupler loss values are used by the TX calibration and audit functions.

SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.

Bay Level Offset Calibration

May 2000 3-59

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Introduction to Bay Level

Offset Calibration

Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the

BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.

RF Path Bay Level Offset

Calibration

Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path

(BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database

calibration table in the LMF. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to

each BBX2.

For starter frames, each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and

terminates at a backplane BBX2 slot. Each transmit path starts at a

BBX2 backplane slot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS

TX antenna port.

For expansion frames each receive path starts at the BTS RX port of the

cell site starter frame, travels through the frame-to-frame expansion

cable, and terminates at a backplane BBX2 slot of the expansion frame.

The transmit path starts at a BBX2 backplane slot of the expansion

frame, travels though the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port

of the same expansion frame.

Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path

(BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database.

Each transmit path starts at a C–CCP shelf backplane BBX2 slot, travels

through the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path

calibration is performed, the RX path BLO is automatically set to the

default value.

At omni sites, BBX2 slots 1 and 13 (redundant) are tested. At sector

sites, BBX2 slots 1 through 12, and 13 (redundant) are tested. Only

those slots (sectors) actually equipped in the current CDF are tested,

regardless of physical BBX2 board installation in the slot.

When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration of BLOs is required:

SAfter initial BTS installation

SOnce each year

SAfter replacing any of the following components or associated

interconnecting RF cabling:

– BBX2 board

– C–CCP shelf

– CIO card

– CIO to LPA backplane RF cable

– LPA backplane

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-60

–LPA

– TX filter / TX filter combiner

– TX thru-port cable to the top of frame

TX Path Calibration

The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the

first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function

of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test

equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.

Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX

OUT connector you must first verify that there are no

CDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sector

assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can

result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.

WARNING

Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap

while handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done,

there is a high probability that the card/module could be

damaged by ESD.

CAUTION

At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of

each CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated

with BBX2 boards), move BBX2 boards from shelves

currently not under test and install them into the empty

BBX2 slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure that

all BBX2 TX paths are tested.

– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites

that are due for periodic optimization.

– Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the

correct BBX2 slots are equipped. Edit the file as

required to include BBX2 slots not currently

equipped (per Systems Engineering documentation).

IMPORTANT

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-61

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

BLO Calibration Data File

During the calibration process, the LMF creates a bts–n.cal calibration

(BLO) offset data file in the bts–n folder. After calibration has been

completed, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBX2s using the

Download BLO function. An explanation of the file is shown below.

Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you

print out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the

following descriptions.

NOTE

The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a

slot Block).

Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX2 slots. Slot 20

contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX2. Each BBX2 slot

header block contains:

SA creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of

createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.

SThe number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries corresponding

to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and

actual calibration data.

SThe calibration data for a BBX2 is organized as a large flat array. The

array is organized by branch, sector, and calibration point.

– The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the

contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main

receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:

Table 3-30: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments

Range Assignment

C[1]–C[240] Transmit

C[241]–C[480] Main Receive

C[481]–C[720] Diversity Receive

Slot 385 is the BLO for the RFDS.

NOTE

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-62

– The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Configurations

supported are Omni, 3–sector or 6–sector.

Table 3-31: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)

BBX2 Sectorization TX RX RX Diversity

Slot[1] (Primary BBX2s 1 through 12)

1 (Omni) 3–Sector

C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]

–

Sector

1st

C[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]

36 Sector,

1st

Carrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]

Carrier 3–Sector

C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]

Carrier

–

Sector

3rd

C[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]

6Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]

73–Sector

C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]

–

Sector

2nd

C[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]

96 Sector,

2nd

Carrier C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]

Carrier 3–Sector

C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]

Carrier

–

Sector

4th

C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]

12 Carrier C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]

Slot[20]] (Redundant BBX2–13)

1 (Omni) 3–Sector

C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]

–

Sector

1st

C[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]

36 Sector,

1st

Carrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]

Carrier 3–Sector

C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]

Carrier

–

Sector

3rd

C[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]

6Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]

73–Sector

C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]

–

Sector

2nd

C[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]

96 Sector,

2nd

Carrier C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]

Carrier 3–Sector

C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]

Carrier

–

Sector

4th

C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]

12 Carrier C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]

STen calibration points per sector are supported for each branch. Two

entries are required for each calibration point.

SThe first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel

(frequency) the BLO is measured at. The second value (all even

entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from

2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500

corresponds to +125 dBm).

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-63

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

SThe 20 calibration entries for each sector/branch combination must be

stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points

(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is

repeated to fill out the 10 points.

Example:

C[1]=384, odd cal entry = 1 ‘‘calibration point”

C[2]=19102, even cal entry

C[3]=777,

C[4]=19086,

C[19]=777,

C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this

would be repeated for the next 8 points)

SWhen the BBX2 is loaded with image = data, the cal file data for the

BBX2 is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the cal

file. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] – C[240]. Sector 1’s ten calibration

points are sent (C[1] – C[20]) followed by sector 2’s ten calibration

points (C[21] – C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next (C[241] –

C[480]), followed by the RxDCal data (C[481] – C[720]).

STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each

set.

Test Equipment Setup:

RF Path Calibration

Follow the procedure in Table 3-32 to set up test equipment.

Table 3-32: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)

Step Action

NOTE

Verify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on.

! CAUTION

To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB

directional coupler for 800 MHz with an additional 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1.7/1.9 GHz.

1Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have not

already done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3–2 on page 3-5.

SIf required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-24 on page 3-52.

SConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 starting on page 3-43.

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-64

TX Path Calibration

The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top

of the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.

For each BBX2, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList

CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr

CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX2 (located

under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file

parameter).

If both the BTS–x.cdf and CBSC–x.cdf files are current,

all information will be correct on the LMF. If not, the

carrier and channel will have to be set for each test.

NOTE

The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB

of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than

+1.5 dB.

The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler

option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.

SAt sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately

42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power

measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX2 TX output level

(approximately –6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.

The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,

is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output

minus BBX2 output level.

SExample: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler

(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately

–2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately

–0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.

The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,

perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Audit

menu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TX

audit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made through

the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:

SCSM–1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBX2s have correct code load and data

load.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.

SAll BBX2s are OOS_RAM.

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-65

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 and

follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to perform the TX calibration test.

Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX

OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2

channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious

personal injury and/or equipment damage.

WARNING

Verify all BBX2 boards removed and repositioned have

been returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX2

boards moved since they were downloaded will have to be

downloaded again.

IMPORTANT

Follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to perform the TX calibration test.

Table 3-33: BTS TX Path Calibration

nStep Action

1Select the BBX2(s) to be calibrated.

2From the Tests menu, select TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. (Press and hold the

<Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.)

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

5Click on OK.

6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the test results.

7Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

Exception Handling

In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL

message in the status report window and provides information in the

Description field.

Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail

again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,

Troubleshooting.

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-66

Download BLO Procedure

After a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset

(BLO) calibration file data to the BBX2s. BLO data is extracted from the

CAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded to

the selected BBX2 devices.

If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this

procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is

downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.

NOTE

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SBBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).

STX calibration is successfully completed.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to download the BLO data to the

BBX2s.

Table 3-34: Download BLO

nStep Action

1Select the BBX2(s) to be downloaded.

2From the Device menu, select Download BLO.

A status report window displays the result of the download.

NOTE

Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.

3Click on OK to close the status report window.

Calibration Audit Introduction

The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation

and storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration audit

procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX2 transmit path at

the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the

success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is

used.

*RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data

download to BBX2s must have been successfully

completed prior to performing the calibration audit.

IMPORTANT

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-67

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Transmit (TX) Path Audit

Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX2

slots, per the procedure in Table 3-35

Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX

OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2

channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious

personal injury and/or equipment damage.

WARNING

If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this

procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is

downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.

NOTE

TX Audit Test

The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a

BBX2(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output

connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

Prerequisites

Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:

SCSM–1, GLI2s, and BBX2s have correct code load and data load.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.

SAll BBX2s are OOS_RAM.

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit

test.

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-68

Table 3-35: BTS TX Path Audit

nStep Action

1Select the BBX2(s) to be audited.

2From the Tests menu, select TX Audit.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.

Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

5Click on OK.

6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the test results.

7Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

Exception Handling

In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL

message in the Status Report window and provides information in the

Description field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the

test. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to

Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.

All Cal/Audit Test

The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration

and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the

appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.

If the TX calibration portion of the test passes, the BLO

data is automatically downloaded to the BBX2(s) before

the audit portion of the test is run.

NOTE

. . . continued on next page

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-69

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Prerequisites

Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:

SCSM–1, GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code and data loads.

SPrimary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.

SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.

STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX

BLO calibration.

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

Follow the procedure in Table 3-36 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.

Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX

OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2

channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious

personal injury and/or equipment damage.

WARNING

Table 3-36: All Cal/Audit Test

nStep Action

1Select the BBX2(s) to be tested.

2From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.

Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.

4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

5Click on OK.

6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the test results.

7Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.

Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-70

Create CAL File

The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and

creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist, a

new one is created. If a CAL file already exists, it is updated. After a

BTS has been fully optimized, a copy of the CAL file must exist so it

can be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully

performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file

exists. Note the following:

SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)

BBXs.

The user is not encouraged to edit the CAL file as this

action can cause interface problems between the BTS and

the LMF. To manually edit the CAL file, you must first

logout of the BTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and

then use the Create Cal File function, the edited

information is lost.

WARNING

Prerequisites

Before running this test, the following should be done:

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

SBBX2s are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.

Table 3-37: Create CAL File

nStep Action

1Select the applicable BBX2s.

NOTE

The CAL file is only updated for the selected BBX2s.

2Click on the Device menu.

3Click on the Create Cal File menu item.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

4 Click OK to close the status report window.

RFDS Setup and Calibration

May 2000 3-71

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

RFDS Description

The RFDS is not available for the –48 V BTS at the time

of this publication.

NOTE

The optional RFDS performs RF tests of the site from the CBSC or from

an LMF. The RFDS consists of the following elements:

SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)

SFWT Interface Card (FWTIC)

SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)

For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA RFDS

Hardware Installation manual and CDMA RFDS User’s Guide.

The LMF provides the following functions for RFDS equipment:

STX and RX Calibration

SDekey Test Subscriber Unit (TSU)

SDownload Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC)

SForward Test

SKey TSU

SMeasure TSU Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI)

SPing TSU

SProgram TSU Number Assignment Module (NAM)

SReverse Test

SRGLI actions (for GLI based RFDS units)

SSet ASU

SStatus TSU

RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-72

RFDS Parameter Settings

The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must

match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the

editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-38 explains how to edit

the parameter settings.

SRfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.

0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped

1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS

2 = Cobra RFDS

STsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) TSU not equipped

1 = TSU is equipped in the system

SMC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped

1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system

(9600 system RFDS only)

SAsu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1

0 = (default) Not equipped

1 = Equipped

STestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to

15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when

originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,

and is to be used in this field.)

Any text editor supporting the LMF may be used to open

any text files to verify, view, or modify data.

NOTE

. . . continued on next page

RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-73

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-38: RFDS Parameter Settings

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.

1Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file

(1 = GLI based RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).

EXAMPLE:

RfdsEquip = 2

TsuEquip = 1

MC1Equip = 0

MC2Equip = 0

MC3Equip = 0

MC4Equip = 0

Asu1Equip = 1

Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)

TestOrigDN = ’123456789’’

NOTE

The above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC and

copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC if the RFDSPARM database is

modified for the RFDS.

2Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields data will need to be downloaded

to the GLI2 (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).

3To download to the GLI2, click on the Device menu and select the Download Data menu item

(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).

A status report window displays the status of the download.

Click OK to close the status report window.

! CAUTION

After downloading data to the GLI2, the RFDS LED slowly begins flashing red and green for

approximately 2–3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED

remains green.

4Status the RFDS TSU.

A status report window displays the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.

* IMPORTANT

If the LMF yields an error message, check the following:

SEnsure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.

SVerify RFDS has power.

SVerify RFDS status LED is green.

SVerify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).

SStatus the MGLI and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and the

device is in the proper state (INS).

RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-74

RFDS TSU NAM Programming

The RFDS TSU NAM must be programmed with the appropriate system

parameters and phone number during hardware installation. The TSU

phone and TSU MSI must be recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R

RFDS software configuration. The TSU NAM should be configured the

same way that any local mobile subscriber would use.

The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial

install of the RFDS.

NOTE

The NAM must be programmed into the SUA before it can receive and

process test calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.

Explanation of Parameters

used when Programming the

TSU NAM

Table 3-39 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.

Table 3-39: Definition of Parameters

Access_Overload_Code

Slot_Index

System ID

Network ID

These parameters are obtained from the switch.

Primary_Channel_A

Primary_Channel_B

Secondary_Channel_A

Secondary_Channel B

These parameters are the channels used in operation of the system.

Lock_Code

Security_Code

Service_Level

Station_Class_Mark

Do not change.

IMSI_11_12

IMSI_MCC These fields can be obtained at the OMC using the following

command:

OMC000>disp bts–# imsi

If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,

otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.

MIN_1 Phone Number This field is the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN and

MIN should be entered into the switch as well.

NOTE: This field is different from the TestOrigDN field in the

bts.cdf file. The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber,

and the TestOrigDN is the number is subscriber calls.

RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-75

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Valid NAM Ranges

Table 3-40 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are

missing or out of range, the RFDS errors out.

Table 3-40: Valid NAM Field Ranges

Valid Range

NAM Field Name Minimum Maximum

Access_Overload_Code 0 15

Slot_Index 0 7

System ID 0 32767

Network ID 0 32767

Primary_Channel_A 25 1175

Primary_Channel_B 25 1175

Secondary_Channel_A 25 1175

Secondary_Channel_B 25 1175

Lock_Code 0 999

Security_Code 0 999999

Service_Level 0 7

Station_Class_Mark 0 255

IMSI_11_12 0 99

IMSI_MCC 0 999

MIN Phone Number N/A N/A

RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-76

Set Antenna Map Data

The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is required if an

RFDS is installed. Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an

RFDS is not installed. The antenna map data must be entered manually.

Perform the procedure in Table 3-41 to set the Antenna Map Data.

Prerequisite

SLogged into the BTS

Table 3-41: Set Antenna Map Data

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit>Antenna Map>TX or RX.

A data entry pop–up window appears.

3 Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.

NOTE

Refer to the Util >Edit–antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.

4Click on the Save button to save displayed values.

NOTE

Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.

5Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.

NOTE

Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.

RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-77

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Set RFDS Configuration Data

If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually

entered. Perform the procedure in Table 3-42 to set the RFDS

Configuration Data.

Prerequisite

SLogged into the BTS.

The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to

the antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.

IMPORTANT

Table 3-42: Set RFDS Configuration Data

Step Action

1Click on the Util menu.

2 Select Edit>RFDS Configuration>TX or RX.

A data entry pop–up window appears.

3To add a new antenna number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the other columns and enter

the desired data.

4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.

NOTE

Refer to the Util >Edit–RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration data

examples.

5To delete a row, click on the row and click on the Delete Row button.

6To save displayed values, click on the Save button.

NOTE

SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.

7To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button .

NOTE

Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.

RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-78

RFDS Calibration

The RFDS TX and RX antenna paths must be calibrated to ensure peak

performance. The RFDS calibration option calibrates the RFDS TX and

RX paths.

For a TX antenna path calibration, the BTS XCVR is keyed at a

pre–determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured

by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna

directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being

used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the

power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna

directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.

For an RX antenna path calibration, the RFDS is keyed at a

pre–determined power level and the power input level is measured by the

BTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the

BTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the

RFDS keyed power level and the power level measured at the BTS

XCVR is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.

The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL

file.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SBBX2s are is INS_TEST

SCable calibration has been performed

STX calibration has been performed and BLO has bee downloaded for

the BTS

STest equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration

STest equipment has been selected and calibrated

Follow the procedure in Table 3-43 to calibrate the TX and RX antenna

paths.

Table 3-43: RFDS Calibration Procedure

nStep Action

1Select the RFDS tab.

2 Select RFDS menu.

3 Select RFDS Calibration menu item.

4Select the appropriate direction (TX or RX) in the Direction pick list.

5Type the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channel box.

NOTE

Separate channel numbers with a comma or dash (no spaces) if using more than one channel

number (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385–395 for numbers through and including).

RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued

May 2000 3-79

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-43: RFDS Calibration Procedure

nActionStep

6Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list.

NOTE

Use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple carriers.

7Select the appropriate Rx branch (Main, Diversity or Both) in the RX Branch pick list.

8Select the appropriate baud rate (1=9600, 2=14400) in the Rate Set pick list.

9 Click OK.

A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window.

10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

A status report window displays the results of the actions.

11 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

Program TSU NAM

Follow the procedure in Table 3-44 to program the TSU NAM. The

NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,

or be used for any type of RFDS test.

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

SMGLI is INS.

STSU is powered up and has a code load.

Table 3-44: Program the TSU NAM

Step Action

1Select the RFDS tab.

2Select the SUA (Cobra RFDS) or TSU (GLI based RFDS).

3Click on the TSU menu.

4Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.

5Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-39 and Table 3-40).

6Click on the OK button to display the status report.

7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

BTS Alarms Testing

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-80

Alarm Test Overview

ALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs and

Outputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors and

output devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of active

sensors as well controlling output devices.

The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 36 input signals

coming into the BTS. These inputs are divided between 2 Alarm

connectors marked ‘ALARM A’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top of

the frame (see Figure 3-19). The ALARM A connector is always

functional; ALARM B is functional when an AMR module is equipped

in the AMR 2 slot in the distribution shelf. ALARM A port monitors

input numbers 1 through 18, while ALARM B port monitors input

numbers 19 through 36 (see Figure 3-20). State transitions on these input

lines are reported to the LMF and OMCR as MGLI Input Relay alarms.

ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8

outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs are

available. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is set

by the CBSC.

Alarm Reporting Display

The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur

after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,

select Util>Alarm Monitor.

The following buttons are included:

SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, and

Major) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of

alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired

alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the <Ctrl> key (for

individual selections) or <Shift> key (for a range of selections) while

clicking on the desired levels.

SThe Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pause

button is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. When

the Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.

Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked and

the Continue button is clicked are not displayed.

SThe Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms that

occur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.

SThe Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.

BTS Alarms Testing – continued

May 2000 3-81

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 3-19: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering

FW00301

Purpose The following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relay

contacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMR

alarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Perform

these procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reported

properly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak system

performance.

Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests

only after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required to

interconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relays

meet requirements called out in the SC 4812T Series BTS Installation

Manual.

Motorola highly recommends that you read and understand

this procedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.

IMPORTANT

Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required to perform these tests:

SLMF

SAlarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) –optional

. . . continued on next page

BTS Alarms Testing – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-82

Abbreviations used in the following figures and tables are

defined as:

SNC = normally closed

SNO = normally open

SCOM or C = common

SCDO = Customer Defined (Relay) Output

SCDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) Input

NOTE

59 1

60 2

ALARM A

(AMR 1) ALARM B

(AMR 2)

Returns

A CDI 18 . . . A CDI 1

59 1

60 2

Returns

B CDI 36 . . . B CDI 19

FW00302

Figure 3-20: AMR Connector Pin Numbering

The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow the

Alarms Test Box Procedure, Table 3-45. If not using an

Alarm Test Box, follow the procedure listed in Table 3-46.

NOTE

CDI Alarm Input Verification

with Alarms Test Box

Table 3-45 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification using

the Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare results

with the LMF display.

It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The

default delay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test box

switches in the new position until the alarms have been

reported.

NOTE

Table 3-45: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.

2Select the MGLI.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Alarms Testing – continued

May 2000 3-83

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-45: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

3Click on the Device menu.

4Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.

5Click on N.O. Inputs.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

7Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.

8Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-19).

9Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for

each switch setting.

10 Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported

for each switch setting.

11 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.

12 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.

13 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for each

switch setting

14 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for each

switch setting.

15 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.

16 Select the MGLI.

17 Click on the Device menu.

18 Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.

19 Click on N.C. Inputs. A status report window displays the results of the action.

20 Click OK to close the status report window.

Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.

21 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.

22 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.

Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.

23 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.

An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.

24 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.

A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.

25 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Alarms Testing – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-84

Table 3-45: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

26 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.

A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.

27 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.

An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.

28 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.

A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.

29 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.

30 Select the MGLI.

31 Click on the Device menu.

32 Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.

33 Click on Unequipped.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

34 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.

35 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.

36 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.

No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.

37 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.

38 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.

39 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.

No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.

40 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.

41 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.

BTS Alarms Testing – continued

May 2000 3-85

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

CDI Alarm Input Verification

without Alarms Test Box

Table 3-46 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification

without the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed

and compare results with the LMF display.

It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The

default delay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins wait

for the alarm report before removing the short.

NOTE

Table 3-46: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.

2Select the MGLI.

3Click on the Device menu

4Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.

5Click on N.O. Inputs.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

6Click on OK to close the status report window.

7Refer to Figure 3-20 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins

(25–26 through 59–60) together.

An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.

A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.

8Refer to Figure 3-20 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins

(25–26 through 59–60) together.

An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.

A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.

9Select the MGLI.

10 Click on the Device menu.

11 Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.

12 Click on N.C. Inputs.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

13 Click on OK to close the status report window.

Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.

. . . continued on next page

BTS Alarms Testing – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-86

Table 3-46: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box

Step Action

14 Refer to Figure 3-20 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins

(25–26 through 59–60) together.

A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.

An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.

15 Refer to Figure 3-20 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins

(25–26 through 59–60) together.

A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.

An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.

16 Select the MGLI.

17 Click on the Device menu

18 Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.

19 Click on Unequipped.

A status report window displays the results of the action.

20 Click on OK to close the status report window.

21 Refer to Figure 3-20 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins

(25–26 through 59–60) together.

No alarms should be displayed.

22 Refer to Figure 3-20 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins

(25–26 through 59–60) together.

No alarms should be displayed.

23 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.

Pin and Signal Information for

Alarm Connectors

Table 3-47 lists the pins and signal names for Alarms A and B.

Table 3-47: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors

ALARM A ALARM B

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name

1A CDO1 NC 31 Cust Retn 4 1B CDO9 NC 31 B CDI 22

2A CDO1 Com 32 A CDI 4 2B CDO9 Com 32 Cust Retn 22

3A CDO1 NO 33 Cust Retn 5 3B CDO9 NO 33 B CDI 23

4A CDO2 NC 34 A CDI 5 4B CDO10 NC 34 Cust Retn 23

5A CDO2 Com 35 Cust Retn 6 5B CDO10 Com 35 B CDI 24

6A CDO2 NO 36 A CDI 6 6B CDO10 NO 36 Cust Retn 24

. . . continued on next page

BTS Alarms Testing – continued

May 2000 3-87

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 3-47: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors

ALARM A ALARM B

Pin Signal NamePinSignal NamePinSignal NamePinSignal Name

7A CDO3 NC 37 Cust Retn 7 7B CDO11 NC 37 B CDI 25

8A CDO3 Com 38 A CDI 7 8B CDO11 Com 38 Cust Retn 25

9A CDO3 NO 39 Cust Retn 8 9B CDO11 NO 39 B CDI 26

10 A CDO4 NC 40 A CDI 8 10 B CDO12 NC 40 Cust Retn 26

11 A CDO4 Com 41 Cust Retn 9 11 B CDO12 Com 41 B CDI 27

12 A CDO4 NO 42 A CDI 9 12 B CDO12 NO 42 Cust Retn 27

13 A CDO5 NC 43 Cust Retn 10 13 B CDO13 NC 43 B CDI 28

14 A CDO5 Com 44 A CDI 10 14 B CDO13 Com 44 Cust Retn 28

15 A CDO5 NO 45 Cust Retn 11 15 B CDO13 NO 45 B CDI 29

16 A CDO6 NC 46 A CDI 11 16 B CDO14 NC 46 Cust Retn 29

17 A CDO6 Com 47 Cust Retn 12 17 B CDO14 Com 47 B CDI 30

18 A CDO6 NO 48 A CDI 12 18 B CDO14 NO 48 Cust Retn 30

19 A CDO7 NC 49 Cust Retn 13 19 B CDO15 NC 49 B CDI 31

20 A CDO7 Com 50 A CDI 13 20 B CDO15 Com 50 Cust Retn 31

21 A CDO7 NO 51 Cust Retn 14 21 B CDO15 NO 51 B CDI 32

22 A CDO8 NC 52 A CDI 14 22 B CDO16 NC 52 Cust Retn 32

23 A CDO8 Com 53 Cust Retn 15 23 B CDO16 Com 53 B CDI 33

24 A CDO8 NO 54 A CDI 15 24 B CDO16 NO 54 Cust Retn 33

25 Cust Retn 1 55 Cust Retn 16 25 B CDI 19 55 B CDI 34

26 A CDI 1 56 A CDI 16 26 Cust Retn 19 56 Cust Retn 34

27 Cust Retn 2 57 Cust Retn 17 27 B CDI 20 57 B CDI 35

28 A CDI 2 58 A CDI 17 28 Cust Retn 20 58 Cust Retn 35

29 Cust Retn 3 59 Cust Retn 18 29 B CDI 21 (+27 V)

Converter Alarm (–48 V)

59 B CDI 36

30 A CDI 3 60 A CDI 18 30 Cust Retn 21 (+27 V)

Converter Retn (–48V)

60 Cust Retn 36

NOTE

CDO = Customer Defined Output

CDI = Customer Defined Input

BTS Alarms Testing – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

3-88

Notes

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)

Table of Contents

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – All–inclusive TX & RX 4-1. . . . . . . . .

Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prerequisites 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX OUT Connection 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Test Procedure 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Individual Acceptance Tests 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tx Mask Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rho Test 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pilot Offset Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Code Domain Power Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Code Domain Power Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FER Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Generate an ATP Report 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ATP Report 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – All–inclusive TX & RX

May 2000 4-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Introduction

The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field

Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS

subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) and

supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)

assignment.

The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a

file that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platform

using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment

supported by the LMF can be used.

Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the

“CAVEATS” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf

folder for any applicable information.

The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS)

sectors only.

DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by the

LMF.

IMPORTANT

Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set

connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test

set components, if required.

NOTE

Customer requirements determine which ATP tests to are to be

performed and the craftsperson selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.

The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:

SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.

These include the GLI, MCC, BBX2, and CIO cards, the LPAs and

passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filter,

and RF cables.

SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.

These includes the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion

frames), CIO, BBX2, MCC, and GLI cards and the passive

components including RX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.

SAll TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.

SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads the BLO,

and executes the TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – All–inclusive TX & RX – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

4-2

ATP Test Prerequisites

Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have been

completed:

SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).

SLMF is logged into the BTS.

SCSMs, GLIs, BBX2s, MCCs, and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) have

correct code load and data load.

SPrimary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT.

SBBX2s are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.

SBBX2s are OOS_RAM.

STest cables are calibrated.

STest equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-13 through

Figure 3-16 starting on page 3-45).

STest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.

SGPIB is on.

Before the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turned

OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports

are properly terminated.

All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP

tests.

Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily

injury or equipment damage.

WARNING

TX OUT Connection

Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking

measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At

sites without RFDS installed, all measurements will be via

the BTS TX OUT connector. At sites with RFDS installed,

all measurements will be via the RFDS directional coupler

TX OUT connector.

IMPORTANT

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – All–inclusive TX & RX – continued

May 2000 4-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

ATP Test Procedure

There are three different ATP testing options that can be performed to

completely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of the

following ATP testing options should be run.

SATP Testing Option 1

– All TX/RX

SATP Testing Option 2

– All TX

– All RX

SATP Testing Option 3

–TX Mask Test

–Rho Test

–Pilot Time Offset Test

–Code Domain Power Test

–FER Test

The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX

path calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.

NOTE

If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,

remove the manual control/system memory card from the

card slot and set the I/O Config to the Talk & Lstn mode

before starting the automated testing.

IMPORTANT

Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.

The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.

NOTE

Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure

nStep Action

1Select the device(s) to be tested.

2From the Tests menu, select the test you want to run.

3Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier

pick list.

NOTE

To select multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while making the selections.

. . . continued on next page

Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – All–inclusive TX & RX – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

4-4

Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure

nActionStep

4Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.

The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the

cbsc–n.cdf file for the BTS.

5Click on the OK button.

The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.

6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.

The test results are displayed in the status report window.

7Click on Save Results or Dismiss.

NOTE

If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.

TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction

May 2000 4-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Individual Acceptance Tests

The following individual ATP tests can be used to verify the results of

specific tests.

Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX2)

This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated

on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification with

respect to the assigned CDF file values.

Waveform Quality (rho)

This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital

waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in

ANSI–J_STD–019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and

perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents

100% (or perfect correlation).

Pilot Time Offset

The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer

measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the

incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot

Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).

Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX2)

This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for

all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is

done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to

10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”

Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel

power).

Frame Error Rate

The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire

CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all

respective sector/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all

traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at

an RF input level of –122 dBm (or –116 dBm if using TMPC).

TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

4-6

Tx Mask Test

This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a

specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are

performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same

command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT

(BTS/RFDS) connector.

The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna and all channel elements

from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using

both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot

channel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as

measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS

directional coupler).

TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power

level to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from

pilot gain set to 541.

NOTE

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the

attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution

bandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel

measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meet

system tolerances at the following test points:

S1.7/1.9 GHz:

– at least –45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency

– at least –45 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequency

S800 MHz:

– at least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequencY

– at least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency

– at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency

The BBX2 then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to

assign the applicable redundant BBX2 to the current TX antenna path

under test. The test is then repeated.

TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued

May 2000 4-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display

– 900 kHz + 900 kHz

Center Frequency

Reference

Attenuation level of all

spurious and IM products

with respect to the mean

power of the CDMA channel

.5 MHz Span/Div

Ampl 10 dB/Div

Mean CDMA Bandwidth

Power Reference

+750 kHz

+ 1980 kHz

– 750 kHz

– 1980 kHz

FW00282

TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

4-8

Rho Test

This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform

quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the

current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external

calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements

are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.

The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements

from the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up using

both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot

channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX2 power output is set to 40

dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or

RFDS directional coupler).

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot

channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that

result meets system tolerances:

SWaveform quality (rho) should be > 0.912 (–0.4 dB).

The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to

assign the applicable redundant BBX2 to the current TX antenna path

under test. The test is then be repeated.

TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test

May 2000 4-9

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Pilot Offset Acceptance Test

This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset

of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current

CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external

calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements

are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.

The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH elements from

the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up using both

bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot

channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to 40

dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or

RFDS directional coupler).

The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot

Time Offset in us, verifying results meet system tolerances:

SPilot Time Offset should be within < 3 µs of the target PT

Offset (0 ms).

The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured to

assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path

under test. The test is then repeated.

TX Code Domain Power Acceptance Test

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

4-10

Code Domain Power Test

This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX2 carrier

keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.

All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by

the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT

(BTS/RFDS) connector.

For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262 and all

MCC channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal

Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes, and be

assigned a full–rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to

be tested an any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32

CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made, so all channel

elements are verified on all sectors.

BBX2 power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT

connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).

You verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for all

ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is

done by verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is

equal to 10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels

measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).

The BBX2 then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to

assign the applicable redundant BBX2 to the current TX antenna path

under test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, OCNS

is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.

TX Code Domain Power Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued

May 2000 4-11

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels

Pilot Channel

Active channels

PILOT LEVEL

MAX OCNS SPEC.

MIN OCNS SPEC.

MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:

< –27 dB SPEC.

Inactive channels

Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64

MAX OCNS

CHANNEL

MIN OCNS

CHANNEL

8.2 dB 12.2 dB

MAX NOISE

FLOOR

Pilot Channel

Active channels

PILOT LEVEL

MAX OCNS SPEC.

MIN OCNS SPEC.

MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:

< –27 dB

Inactive channels

Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64

FAILURE – DOES NOT

MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.

FAILURE – EXCEEDS

MAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dB

FAILURE – EXCEEDS MAX

NOISE FLOOR SPEC.

Showing all OCNS Passing

Indicating Failures FW00283

RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

4-12

FER Test

This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently

configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input

level of –122 dBm [or –116 dBm if using Tower Top Amplifier

(TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set as

the signal source controlled by the same command. All measurements

are via the LMF.

The pilot gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna and all channel elements

from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up using

only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel

element only). BBX2 power output is set to –20 dBm as measured at the

TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).

BBX2 must be keyed in order to enable the RX receive circuitry.

The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode

and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse

link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying that

results meet the following specification:

SFER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500

All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The

BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assign

the applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths under

test. The test is then repeated.

Generate an ATP Report

May 2000 4-13

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Background

Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the

results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to

close the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if the

status reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.

ATP Report

Each time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTS

and includes the following for each test:

STest name

SBBX2 number

SChannel number

SCarrier number

SSector number

SUpper test limit

SLower test limit

STest result

SPASS or FAIL

SDescription information (if applicable)

STime stamp

SDetails/Warning information (if applicable)

The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.

Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATP

report for a BTS.

Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report

nStep Action

1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).

2Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.

3Click on the Report button.

4Click on a column heading to sort the report.

5– If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.

– If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file type in the picklist and click on the

Save button.

Generate an ATP Report – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

4-14

Notes

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Chapter 5: Prepare to Leave the Site

Table of Contents

External Test Equipment Removal 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset All Devices 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Site Span Configuration Verification 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set BTS Site Span Configuration 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Updating CBSC LMF Files 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LMF Removal 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Re–connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem 5-8. . . . . . . . . .

Re–establish OMC–R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Prepare to Leave the Site

May 2000 5-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

External Test Equipment

Removal

Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment and

configure the BTS for active service.

Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal

Step Action

1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors on the top of the frame.

2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the top of the frame.

Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the

correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will

cause system degradation of call processing.

CAUTION

Each module or device can be in any state prior to

downloading. Each module or device will be in an

OOS_RAM state after downloading has completed.

– For all LMF commands, information in italics

represents valid ranges for that command field.

– Only those fields requiring an input will be specified.

Default values for other fields will be assumed.

– For more complete command examples (including

system response details), refer to the CDMA LMF

User Guide.

NOTE

Prepare to Leave the Site – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

5-2

Reset All Devices

Reset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The

configuration data and code loads could be different from data and code

on the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper data

and code when the span is active again.

Follow the procedure in Table 5-2 as required to bring all processor

modules from the OOS to INS mode.

Have the CBSC/MM bring up the site and enable all

devices at the BTS.

IMPORTANT

Table 5-2: Enabling Devices

nStep Action

1On the LMF, select the device(s) you wish to enable.

NOTE

The MGLI and CSM must be INS before an MCC can be put INS.

2Click on Device from the menu bar.

3Click on Enable from the Device menu.

A status report window is displayed.

NOTE

If a BBX2 is selected, a Transceiver Parameters window is displayed to collect keying

information.

Do not enable the BBX2.

4 Click OK to close the Transceiver Parameters window.

A status report window displays the status of the device.

5 Click OK to close the status report window.

The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green.

Prepare to Leave the Site – continued

May 2000 5-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

BTS Site Span Configuration

Verification

Perform the procedure in Table 5-3 to verify the current Span Framing

Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/SGLI2

boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be

verified.

Table 5-3: BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

1Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the

MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).

2Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see

Table 3-7 on page 3-12).

NOTE

The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COMM1 is being

used for the MMI session.

3Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/SGLI2 framing format and line

code configuration (in bold type):

span view <cr>

Observe a display similar to the options shown below:

COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view

The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.

56K AMI 64K B8ZS

56K

AMI 64K

B8ZS

Span Type=T1–3 Span Type=T1–2

Span Rate=56 Span Rate=64

Span A Type=T1 long haul Span A Type=T1 long haul

Span B Type=T1 long haul Span B Type=T1 long haul

Lapd slot for Span A=0 Lapd slot for Span A=0

Lapd slot for Span B=0 Lapd slot for Span B=0

NOTE

If the current MGLI2/SGLI2 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correct

choice, proceed to Table 5-4.

Prepare to Leave the Site – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

5-4

FW00344

9–PIN TO 9– PIN

RS–232 CABLE

NULL MODEM BOARD

(PART# 8484877P01)

RS–232 CABLE

FROM LMF COM 1

PORT

MMI SERIAL PORT

GLI BOARD

Figure 5-1: MGLI2/SGLI2 MMI Port Connection

Set BTS Site Span

Configuration

Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to configure the Span Framing

Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/SGLI2

boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be

configured.

Table 5-4: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

1If required, set the Span Framing Format / Line Code parameters by entering the following MMI

command to configure the framing format to match that of the spans A and B run to the site:

span set <

option

><cr>

Where: option = the framing format option from the list below:

Option Description Remarks

E1_1 E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16

E1_2 E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16

E1_3 E1_3 – E1 HDB3, CRC4 no TS16

E1_4 E1_4 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16

T1_1 T1_1 – D4, AMI, NO ZCS

T1_2 T1_2 – ESF, B8ZS

T1_3 T1_3 – D4, AMI, ZCS

J1_1 J1_1 – ESF, B8ZS (Japan) – (Default)

J1_2 J1_2 – ESF, B8ZS

Example, to set span to “E1_3”:

span set E1_3 <cr>

Observe that the acknowledgement is displayed.

. . . continued on next page

Prepare to Leave the Site – continued

May 2000 5-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 5-4: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration

Step Action

2Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI/SGLI Span Rate:

config ni linkspeed <cr>

Observe that the acknowledgement is displayed similar to the output shown below.

Option Linkspeed Option

56 56k (default for T1_1 and T1–3 systems)

64 64k (default for all other span configurations)

default Use the default speed appropriate for the span type

The linkspeed parameter in flash is set to use the 64k

Currently the link is running at 64

The actual rate is 0.

3If the current MGLI2/SGLI2 span rate does not display the correct choice, set the span rate by entering

the following MMI command to configure the span rate to match what is needed:

config ni linkspeed

<cr><cr> { where option = 64, 56, default }

* IMPORTANT

After the “span set” and “config ni linkspeed” commands are executed, the affected MGLI2/SGLI2

board MUST be reset and re–loaded for changes to take effect.

Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at

the site.

4Press the RESET button on the GLI2 for changes to take effect.

5This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next SGLI2

and repeat steps 1 through 4 for ALL MGLI2/SGLI2 boards.

6Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.

Prepare to Leave the Site – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

5-6

Updating CBSC LMF Files

Updated calibration (CAL) file information must be moved from the

LMF Windows environment back to the CBSC which resides in a Unix

environment. The procedures that follow detail how to move files from

one environment to the other.

Backup CAL Data to a Diskette

The BLO calibration files should be backed up to a diskette (per BTS).

Follow the procedure in Table 5-5 to copy CAL files from a CDMA

LMF computer to a diskette.

Table 5-5: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette

nStep Action

1Insert a diskette into the LMF A drive.

NOTE

If your diskette has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The diskette must be DOS

formatted before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or online helps on

how to format diskettes.

2Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from the Programs menu.

3Click on your C: drive.

4Double Click on the wlmf folder.

5Double Click on the CDMA folder.

6Click on the bts–# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.

7Drag the BTS–#.cal file to the 3–1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release the

mouse button.

8Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired.

9Close the Windows Explorer program by selecting Close from the File menu option.

Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC

Follow the procedure in Table 5-6 to copy CAL files from a diskette to

the CBSC.

Table 5-6: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC

nStep Action

1Login to the CBSC on the workstation using your account name and password.

NOTE

Enter the information that appears in bold text.

2Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.

3 Type eject –q and press the <Enter> key.

. . . continued on next page

Prepare to Leave the Site – continued

May 2000 5-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 5-6: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC

nActionStep

4 Type mount and press the <Enter> key.

Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.

NOTE

If the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a

number. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.

5 Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the <Enter> key.

6 Enter ls –lia and press the <Enter> key. Verify that the bts–#.cal file is on the disk.

7 Enter cd and press the <Enter> key.

8 Enter pwd and press the <Enter> key.

Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/<name>).

9 Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the <Enter> key (where # is the

BTS number).

10 Enter ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key.

Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.

11 Type eject and press the <Enter> key.

12 Remove the diskette from the workstation.

LMF Removal

DO NOT power down the LMF without performing the

procedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may

result, and in some cases, the LMF may lock up.

CAUTION

Follow the procedure in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session and

remove the terminal.

Table 5-7: LMF Termination and Removal

nStep Action

1From the CDMA window select File>Exit.

2From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown.

Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears.

3Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.

4Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as

required for equipment transport.

Prepare to Leave the Site – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

5-8

Re–connect BTS T1 Spans

and Integrated Frame Modem

Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors that

were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-8

and Figure 5-2 as required.

Table 5-8: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections

Step Action

1Connect the 50–pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50–pin TELCO connectors.

2If used, connect the dial–up modem RS–232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS–232 9–pin

sub D connector.

* IMPORTANT

Verify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated Frame Modem

(IFM) “TELCO” connector.

Figure 5-2: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections

50–PIN TELCO

CONNECTORS

REMOVED

SPAN A CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

SPAN B CONNECTOR

(TELCO) INTERFACE

TO SPAN LINES

TOP OF frame

(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)

RS–232 9–PIN SUB D

CONNECTOR SERIAL

PORT FOR EXTERNAL

DIAL UP MODEM

CONNECTION (IF USED)

FW00299

Re–establish OMC–R Control/

Verifying T1/E1

After all activities at the site have been completed, and

after disconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the

OMC–R and request the BTS be placed under control of

the OMC–R.

IMPORTANT

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting

Table of Contents

Basic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Communicate to Power Meter 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Download 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Download CODE to Any Device (card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot ENABLE Device 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Miscellaneous Errors 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Load BLO 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibration Audit Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor

Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multi–FER Test Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Problem Description 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver

Operation 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

No GPS Reference Source 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checksum Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connector Functionality 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Digital Control Problems 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC Power Problems 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Module Status Indicators 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI2,

CSM, BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E) 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CSM LED Status Combinations 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLI2 LED Status Combinations 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBX2 LED Status Combinations 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MCC24/8E LED Status Combinations 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Troubleshooting Overview

May 2000 6-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Overview

The information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely to

be encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.

This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document

for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic

troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform

per the procedure documented in the manual.

Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field

and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and

classrooms.

Troubleshooting: Installation

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-2

Cannot Log into Cell-Site

Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.

Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures

nStep Action

1If MGLI2 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI2 by re-seating it. If this

persists, install a known good MGLI2 card in MGLI2 slot and retry. A Red LED may also indicate

no Ethernet termination at top of frame.

2Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-1 on page 3-4).

If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.

3Try pinging the MGLI2 (see Table 3-8 on page 3-16).

4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (see

Table 3-2 on page 3-5).

5Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3–6).

6Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].

7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-5 on page 3-15).

8Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary

port.

9Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for this

connection.

10 Re-boot the LMF and retry.

11 Re-seat the MGLI2 and retry.

12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly.

Cannot Communicate to

Power Meter

Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter

communication failure.

Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.

2Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.

3Verify the GPIB address of the Power Meter is set to 13.

4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct.

Refer to the Test Equipment setup section for details.

. . . continued on next page

Troubleshooting: Installation – continued

May 2000 6-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure

nActionStep

5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be

‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB Box

and retry.

6Verify that the Com1 port is not used by another application.

7Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode.

Cannot Communicate to

Communications Analyzer

Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communications

analyzer communication failure.

Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the analyzer is connected to the LMF with GPIB adapter.

2Verify the cable setup.

3Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.

4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct.

Refer to the Test Equipment setup section starting on page 3–34 for details.

5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be

‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB Box

and retry.

6Verify that the Com1 port is not used by another application.

7If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.

Troubleshooting: Download

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-4

Cannot Download CODE to

Any Device (card)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code download

failure.

Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure

nStep Action

1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.

2Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.

3Communication to the MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS

device. The MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).

4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.

5If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset the card by re-seating it. If this

persists, replace with a card from another slot & retry.

NOTE

The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.

6Re-seat the card and try again.

7If BBX2 reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.

8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the

device and Reset.

Cannot Download DATA to

Any Device (Card)

Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data download

failure.

Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure

nStep Action

1Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.

Troubleshooting: Download – continued

May 2000 6-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Cannot ENABLE Device

Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the

OOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The color

of the device changes to green, once it is enabled.

The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:

SEnabled (green, INS)

SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)

SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enable

failure.

Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure

nStep Action

1Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.

2If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell

site location and GPS sync.

3Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.

NOTE

MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.

4Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.

5The BBX2 should not be enabled for ATP tests.

6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is operable.

Miscellaneous Errors

Perform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneous

failures.

Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures

nStep Action

1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an

MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection. Enter ALARMS in the

Hyperterminal window. The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.

(Call Field Support for further assistance.)

Troubleshooting: Calibration

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-6

Bay Level Offset Calibration

Failure

Perform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration

failure.

Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section) and

connection is made to the proper TX port.

2Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:

For 1900 MHz:

Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16; SSType=16

For 800 MHz:

Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=8

For 1700 MHz:

Bandclass=4; Freq_Band=128; SSType=16

3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the

circuit breaker, and after 5 seconds, pushing back in.

4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensor head.

5Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be

‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and

on) the GPIB Box and retry.

6Verify sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref

signal.

7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will show

“RES :’’

Troubleshooting: Calibration – continued

May 2000 6-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Cannot Load BLO

For Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.

Calibration Audit Failure

Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit

failure.

Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure

nStep Action

1Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of Chapter 3).

2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensor head.

3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the

circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.

4Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power

Ref signal.

5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBX2s before auditing. Click on the

BBX2(s) and select Device>Download BLO

Re-try the audit.

6Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be ‘ON’

(Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on)

the GPIB Box and retry.

Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-8

Cannot Perform Txmask

Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a TX mask

measurement failure.

Table 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX2(s).

2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.

3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set the LPA by pulling the

circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.

Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot

Time Offset Measurement

Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot time

offset measurement failure.

Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.

2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.

3Re–load BBX2 data and repeat the test.

4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.

5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the

circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.

6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPS

is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error). Go to the freq. bar in the upper

right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press <Shift–avg> and enter 10, to obtain an average

Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to be

re-initialized.

Troubleshooting – Transmit ATP – continued

May 2000 6-9

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Cannot Perform Code Domain

Power and Noise Floor

Measurement

Perform the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a code domain and

noise floor measurement failure.

Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.

2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.

3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).

Cannot Perform Carrier

Measurement

Perform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a carrier

measurement failure.

Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure

nStep Action

1Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability 10 MHz

Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected to test set-up. 6

Troubleshooting: Receive ATP

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-10

Multi–FER Test Failure

Perform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi–FER

failure.

Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.

2Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.

On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.

3Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.

4Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).

5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of

failure).

6Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.

Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist

May 2000 6-11

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Problem Description

Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) boards may be

resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.

This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,

some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before

returning suspect CSM boards.

Intermittent 19.6608 MHz

Reference Clock / GPS

Receiver Operation If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or

SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version

“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model AB

to the repair center.

No GPS Reference Source

Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kit

SGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit

SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly

configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to

change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS

antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.

Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a

non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical

disturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another

download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM board

back to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.

GPS Bad RX Message Type

This is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 or

higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version of

CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.

Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSM

board back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.

CSM Reference Source

Configuration Error This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed in

the field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132

must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) to

function correctly.

CSM Kit

No. Hardware

Configuration CSM Slot

No. Reference Source

Configuration CDF Value

SGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPS

Backup = Either LFR or HSO

2 or 18

SGLN4132 Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPS

Backup = Either LFR or HSO

2 or 18

Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-12

Takes Too Long for CSM to

Come INS

This may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracy

flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system time/GPS

and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satellite

should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellites

should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verify

correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting

May 2000 6-13

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Introduction

The C–CCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all the

C–CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible

improper diagnoses when problems occur.

Connector Functionality

The following connector overview describes the major types of

backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This will

allow the CFE to:

SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem

type.

SAllow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.

Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf Bus (ISB)

Connectors

The 40 pin ISB connectors provide an interface bus from the master

GLI2 to all other GLI2s in the modem frame. Their basic function is to

provide clock synchronization from the master GLI2 to all other GLI2s

in the frame.

The ISB also provides the following functions:

SSpan line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.

SMMI connection to/from the master GLI2 to cell site modem.

SInterface between GLI2s and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).

Span Line Connector

The span line input is an 8 pin RJ–45 connector that provides a primary

and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI2 in the C–CCP

shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master

GLI2 and also all the BBX2 traffic.

Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference Distribution

Module (RDM) Input/Output

These connectors route the 3 MHz reference signals from the CSMs to

the GLI2s and all BBX2s in the backplane. The signals are used to phase

lock loop all clock circuits on the GLI2s and BBX2 boards to produce

precise clock and signal frequencies.

Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)

Provides a +27 volt or –48 volt input for use by the power supply

modules.

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-14

Power Supply Module Interface

Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to

provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C–CCP backplane. These

include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin

interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C–CCP

Power Modules convert +27 or –48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and

+5.0 Volts to be used by the C–CCP shelf cards. In the –48 V BTS, the

LPA power modules convert –48 Volts to a regulated +27 Volts.

GLI2 Connector

This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a

6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors

provide inputs/outputs for the GLI2s in the C–CCP backplane.

GLI2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections

These BNC connectors are located on the C–CCP backplane and routed

to the GLI2 board. This interface provides all the control and data

communications between the master GLI2 and the other GLI2, between

gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.

BBX2 Connector

Each BBX2 connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector

and two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,

digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBX2s in the C–CCP backplane.

CIO Connectors

SRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters

(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –

the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to

the other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the

C–CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to

the appropriate BBX2.

SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX2, to

the backplane, then on to the MCC24 slots.

SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24s. Each

output is routed from the MCC24 slot via the backplane appropriate

BBX2.

STX RF path signal originates from the BBX2, through the backplane

to the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling

to the LPAs in the LPA shelf.

C–CCP Backplane

Troubleshooting Procedure

Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshooting

problems that appear to be related to a defective C–CCP backplane. The

tables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should be

taken in an attempt to find the root cause.

. . . continued on next page

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued

May 2000 6-15

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must be completed before

replacing ANY C–CCP backplane.

IMPORTANT

Digital Control Problems

No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)

Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI2 control via

LMF failure.

Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)

nStep Action

1Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.

2Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.

3Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.

No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI2s)

Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot

GLI2 control failures.

Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI2s)

Step Action

1Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.

2Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.

3Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.

5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI2 for proper connection and

damage.

6Check the span line configuration on the MGLI2 (see Table 5-3 on page 5-3).

Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2

Step Action

1Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.

2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.

3Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-16

No AMR Control (MGLI2 good)

Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR control

failure when the MGLI control is good.

Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR

Step Action

1Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.

3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.

No BBX2 Control in the Shelf – (No Control over Co–located

GLI2s)

Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX2 control in

the shelf failure.

Table 6-19: No BBX2 Control in the Shelf – No Control over Co–located GLI2s

Step Action

1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.

3Visually check BBX2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

4Replace the BBX2 with a known good BBX2.

No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic

Perform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line traffic

failure.

Table 6-20: MGLI2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic

Step Action

1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.

3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.

4If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX2, replace the MGLI2 with a known good MGLI2.

5Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-3 on page 5-3).

6Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued

May 2000 6-17

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

No (or Missing) MCC24 Channel Elements

Perform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elements

failure.

Table 6-21: No MCC24 Channel Elements

Step Action

1Verify CEs on a co–located MCC24 (MccType=2)

2If the problem seems to be limited to 1 MCC24, replace the MCC24 with a known good MCC24.

– Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.

3If no CEs on any MCC24:

– Verify clock reference to CIO.

4Check CDF for MCCTYPE=2 (MCC 24) or MCCTYPE=0 (MCC 8).

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-18

DC Power Problems

Perform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage

to power supply module failure.

Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to

the BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a

second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all

rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this

test.

WARNING

No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module

Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module

Step Action

1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.

2Verify there are no breakers tripped.

* IMPORTANT

If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and

attempt to reset it.

– If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.

– If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub–assembly within the shelf.

3Verify that the C–CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.

4Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C–CCP backplane by

measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.

– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.

– If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” power

feed clip on the distribution backplane. If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip

for damage.

5If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.

6Replace the power supply module with a known good module.

7If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C–CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has

occurred.

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued

May 2000 6-19

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI2,

BBX2, or Switchboard

Perform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage

to GLI2, BBX2, or Switchboard failure.

Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module

Step Action

1Verify steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.

2Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.

3Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.

TX and RX Signal Routing

Problems

Perform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signal

routing problems.

Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems

Step Action

1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–plane connectors for damage in all the affected board

slots.

2Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-20

Module Status Indicators

Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)

LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is

labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.

Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm

(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.

The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.

Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of the

PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.

LED Status Combinations for

All Modules (except GLI2,

CSM, BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E)

PWR/ALM LED

The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.

SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.

SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to

electrical hardware failure.

Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete

module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or

interrupted.

DC/DC Converter LED Status

Combinations

The PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the

state of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C–CCP and LPA

power converters.

PWR/ALM LED

The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.

SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.

SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to

electrical hardware problem.

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued

May 2000 6-21

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

CSM LED Status

Combinations PWR/ALM LED

The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and

software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.

After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the Flash

EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loaded

from the Flash EPROM.

SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.

SSolid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)

condition.

SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.

SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.

SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in

DUMB mode.

SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.

SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.

SOff – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.

SSolid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During

SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If

SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and

the CSM attempts to reboot.)

PWR/ALM

Indicator

FREQ

MONITOR

SYNC

MONITOR

FW00303

Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports

. . . continued on next page

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-22

FREQ Monitor Connector

A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows

monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When

both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2

clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.

The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm

(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.

SYNC Monitor Connector

A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows

monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the

CSMs.

At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse

width of 153 nanoseconds.

MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232

MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the development

or factory environment, but may be used in the field for

debug/maintenance purposes.

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued

May 2000 6-23

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

GLI2 LED Status

Combinations

The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described

below and shown in Figure 6-2.

The indicators and controls consist of:

SFour LEDs

SOne pushbutton

ACTIVE LED

Solid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf

control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.

Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be

active.

MASTER LED

SSolid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).

SOff – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).

ALARM LED

SSolid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.

SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is

performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).

SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is

performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).

SOff – No Alarm.

STATUS LED

SFlashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating

condition.

SOn – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.

SOff – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.

SPANS LED

SSolid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.

SSolid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-24

GLI2 Pushbuttons and

Connectors RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes a

partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. The GLI2 is

placed in the OOS_ROM state

MMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be

used primarily in the development or factory environment but may be

used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.

LAN Connectors (A & B) – The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuit board

mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom front edge of the

GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernet cabling is connected

to tee connectors fastened to these BNC connectors.

Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel

MMI PORT

CONNECTOR

ACTIVE LED

STATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVE

STATUS LED

RESET

PUSHBUTTON

ALARM LED

SPANS LED

MASTER LED

STATUS OFF - operating normally

ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.

SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)

RESET

ALARM OFF - operating normally

ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.

SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)

SPANS

MASTER

MMI PORT

CONNECTOR

ACTIVE

LED OPERATING STATUS

All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing

the switch.

ON - operating normally in active card

OFF - operating normally in standby card

Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant

card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails

ON - active card operating normally

OFF - standby card operating normally

The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the

top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in

the bottom shelf is in the standby mode.

OFF - card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby

GREEN - operating normally

YELLOW - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving

a remote alarm indication signal from the far end

RED - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm

state

An RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as

an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of

115,200 baud communications.

FW00225

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued

May 2000 6-25

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

BBX2 LED Status

Combinations

PWR/ALM LED

The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that

controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.

The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:

SSolid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarm

SSolid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarm

SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm

SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm

SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm

SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm

SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarm

MCC24/8E LED Status

Combinations

The MCC24/MCC8E module has LED indicators and connectors as

described below (see Figure 6-3). Note that the figure does not show the

connectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.

The LED indicators and their states are as follows:

PWR/ALM LED

SRED – fault on module

ACTIVE LED

SOff – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.

SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.

SRapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.

SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.

PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs

SSolid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.

MMI Connectors

SThe RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used

primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used

in the field for debugging purposes.

SThe RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used

primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field

for high data rate debugging purposes.

. . . continued on next page

Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-26

Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel

PWR/ALM LED

LENS

(REMOVABLE)

ACTIVE LED

PWR/ALM ACTIVE

PWR/ALM OFF - operating normally

ON - briefly during powerĆup and during failure

ąconditions

ACTIVE

LED OPERATING STATUS

RAPIDLY BLINKING - Card is codeĆloaded but

ąnot enabled

SLOW BLINKING - Card is not codeĆloaded

ON - card is codeĆloaded and enabled

ą(INS_ACTIVE)

COLOR

GREEN

RED

RED ON - fault condition

SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) - CHI

ąbus inactive on powerĆup

An alarm is generated in the event of a failure

FW00224

LPA Shelf LED Status

Combinations

LPA Module LED

Each LPA module contains a bi–color LED just above the MMI

connector on the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED as

follows:

SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal

condition).

SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an

low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and

does not constitute a failure.

Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link

May 2000 6-27

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Span Problems (No Control

Link)

Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control link

failure.

Table 6-25: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure

nStep Action

1Verify the span settings using the span_view command on the active master GLI2 MMI port. If

these are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command. Any alarms conditions

indicate that the span is not operating correctly.

– Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the Mobility Manager (MM) and

verify that the looped signal is good.

– Listen for control tone on appropriate timeslot from Base Site and MM.

2If no traffic channels in groomed MCC24s (or in whole C–CCP shelf) can process calls, verify

that the ISB cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.

Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

6-28

Notes

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Appendix A: Data Sheets

Appendix Content

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Optimization Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPA Convergence A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification

for 3–Sector Configurations A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification

for 6–Sector Configurations A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TX Antenna VSWR A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AMR Verification A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Site Serial Number Check List A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C–CCP Shelf A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LPAs A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Conversion Shelf (–48 V BTS Only) A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets

May 2000 A-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Verification of Test Equipment

Used

Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used

Manufacturer Model Serial Number

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-2

Site Checklist

Table A-2: Site Checklist

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Deliveries Per established procedures

-Floor Plan Verified

Inter Frame Cables:

Ethernet

Frame Ground

Power

Per procedure

Factory Data:

BBX2

Test Panel

RFDS

Per procedure

-Site Temperature

-Dress Covers/Brackets

Preliminary Operations

Table A-3: Preliminary Operations

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage

-BBX Jumpers Verified per procedure

-Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedure

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

May 2000 A-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Pre–Power and Initial Power

Tests

Table A-4: Pre–power Checklist

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Pre–power–up tests Verify power supply

output voltage at the top

of each BTS frame is

within specifications

Internal Cables:

ISB (all cages)

CSM (all cages)

Power (all cages)

Ethernet Connectors

LAN A ohms

LAN B ohms

LAN A shield

LAN B shield

Ethernet Boots

verified

isolated

installed

-Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed

-Initial power–up tests Verify power supply

output voltage at the top

of each BTS frame is

within specifications:

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-4

General Optimization

Checklist

Table A-5: Pre–power Checklist

OK Parameter Specification Comments

LEDs

Frame fans

illuminated

operational

LMF to BTS Connection

Preparing the LMF

Log into the LMF PC

Create site specific BTS directory

Create master–bts–cdma directory

Download device loads

Moving/Linking files

per procedure

Ping LAN A

Ping LAN B

per procedure

Download/Enable MGLI2s

Download/Enable GLI2s

Set Site Span Configuration

Download CSMs

Download

Enable CSMs

Download/Enable MCC24s

Download BBX2s

Download TSU (in RFDS)

Program TSU NAM

per procedure

-Test Set Calibration per procedure

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

May 2000 A-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

GPS Receiver Operation

Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-GPS Receiver Control Task State:

tracking satellites

Verify parameter

-Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimated

or Surveyed

-Current Position:

lat

lon

height

RECORD in

msec and cm also

convert to deg

min sec

-Current Position: satellites tracked

Estimated:

(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible

Surveyed:

(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible

Verify parameter

as appropriate:

-GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of

Precision

(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)

Verify parameter

-Current reference source:

Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameter

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-6

LFR Receiver Operation

Table A-7: LFR Receiver Operation

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-Station call letters M X Y Z

assignment. as specified in site

documentation

-SN ratio is > 8 dB

-LFR Task State: 1fr

locked to station xxxx

Verify parameter

-Current reference source:

Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes

Verify parameter

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

May 2000 A-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

LPA IM Reduction

Table A-8: LPA IM Reduction

Parameter Comments

LPA

CARRIER

Specification

LPA

#4:1 & 2:1

3–Sector 2:1

6–Sector Dual BP

3–Sector Dual BP

6–Sector

Specification

-1A C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-1B C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-2A C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-2B C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-3A C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-3B C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms

-4A C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-4B C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-5A C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-5B C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-6A C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-6B C3 C1 C1 No Alarms

-7A C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-7B C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-8A C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-8B C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-9A C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-9B C2 C2 C2 No Alarms

-10A C4 C2 No Alarms

-10B C4 C2 No Alarms

-11A C4 C2 No Alarms

-11B C4 C2 No Alarms

-12A C4 C2 No Alarms

-12B C4 C2 No Alarms

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-8

LPA Convergence

Table A-9: LPA Convergence

OK Parameter Specification Data

LPA # Converged

-1A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-1B convergence data

-2A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-2B convergence data

-3A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-3B convergence data

-4A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-4B convergence data

-5A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-5B convergence data

-6A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-6B convergence data

-7A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-7B convergence data

-8A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-8B convergence data

-9A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-9B convergence data

-10A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-10B convergence data

-11A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-11B convergence data

-12A Verify per procedure & upload

convergence data

-12B convergence data

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

May 2000 A-9

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

TX Bay Level Offset/Power

Output Verification for

3–Sector Configurations 1–Carrier

2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels

4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX2–8, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–4, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX2–5, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-BBX2–6, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–10, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX2–11, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-BBX2–12, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-10

Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 1

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

carrier

BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 2

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–8, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

carrier

BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–4, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 3

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–5, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

carrier

BBX2–6, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–10, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 4

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–11, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

carrier

BBX2–12, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

May 2000 A-11

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

2–Carrier Adjacent Channel

Table A-11: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration

BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–7, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration

BBX2–8, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

-BBX2–9, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB

-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 1

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

carrier

BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–7, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 2

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–8, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

carrier

BBX2–9, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-12

3–Carrier Adjacent Channels

4–Carrier Adjacent Channels

Table A-12: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX2–8, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–4, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX2–5, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

-BBX2–6, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB

-BBX2–10, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–3, ANT–4 = dB

-Calibrate

carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)

prior to calibration

BBX2–11, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

-BBX2–12, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB

-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 1

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

carrier

BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

May 2000 A-13

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table A-12: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 2

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–8, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

carrier

BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

-BBX2–4, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 3

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–5, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

carrier

BBX2–6, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB

-BBX2–10, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB

Calibration

Audit

carrier 4

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

post calibration

BBX2–11, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

carrier

BBX2–12, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-14

TX Bay Level Offset/Power

Output Verification for

6–Sector Configurations 1–Carrier

2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels

Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)

OK Parameter Specification Comments

-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

carrier 1

y ( yp ),

38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX2–4, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB

-BBX2–5, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

-BBX2–6, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB

-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-BBX2–8, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),

BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

carrier 2

y ( yp ),

38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX2–10, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–3, ANT–4 = dB

-BBX2–11, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

-BBX2–12, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

. . . continued on next page

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

May 2000 A-15

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)

OK CommentsSpecificationParameter

-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-BBX2–2, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-Calibration

Audit

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

dit

carrier 1

()g

post calibration BBX2–4, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB

-BBX2–5, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

-BBX2–6, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB

-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB

-BBX2–8, ANT–2 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB

-Calibration

Audit

0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution

BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB

dit

carrier 2

()g

post calibration BBX2–10, ANT–4 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB

-BBX2–11, ANT–5 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB

-BBX2–12, ANT–6 = dB

BBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-16

BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests

Table A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests

OK Parameter Specification Data

-SIF: Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure

-MGLI2 redundancy test Verify per procedure

-GLI2 redundancy test Verify per procedure

-Power supply/converter

redundancy Verify per procedure

-Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure

-CSM, GPS, & LFR

redundancy/alarm tests Verify per procedure

-LPA redundancy test Verify per procedure

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

TX Antenna VSWR

Table A-15: TX Antenna VSWR

OK Parameter Specification Data

-VSWR –

Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)

Comments:________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued

May 2000 A-17

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

RX Antenna VSWR

Table A-16: RX Antenna VSWR

OK Parameter Specification Data

-VSWR –

Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)

-VSWR –

Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)

Comments:_________________________________________________________

AMR Verification

Table A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification

OK Parameter Specification Data

Verify CDI alarm input

operation (“ALARM A”

(numbers 1 –18)

BTS Relay #XX –

Contact Alarm

Sets/Clears

Verify CDI alarm input

operation (“ALARM B”

(numbers 19 –36)

BTS Relay #XX –

Contact Alarm

Sets/Clears

Comments:_________________________________________________________

Site Serial Number Check List

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-18

Date Site

C–CCP Shelf

Site I/O A & B

C–CCP Shelf

CSM–1

CSM–2

HSO

CCD–1

CCD–2

AMR–1

AMR–2

MPC–1

MPC–2

Fans 1–3

GLI2–1

GLI2–2

BBX2–1

BBX2–2

BBX2–3

BBX2–4

BBX2–5

BBX2–6

BBX2–7

BBX2–8

BBX2–9

BBX2–10

BBX2–11

BBX2–12

BBX2–r

MCC24/MCC8E–1

MCC24/MCC8E–2

MCC24/MCC8E–3

MCC24/MCC8E–4

MCC24/MCC8E–5

MCC24/MCC8E–6

MCC24/MCC8E–7

MCC24/MCC8E–8

MCC24/MCC8E–9

MCC24/MCC8E–10

MCC24/MCC8E–11

Site Serial Number Check List – continued

May 2000 A-19

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

MCC24/MCC8E–12

CIO

SWITCH

PS–1

PS–2

PS–3

LPAs

LPA 1A

LPA 1B

LPA 1C

LPA 1D

LPA 2A

LPA 2B

LPA 2C

LPA 2D

LPA 3A

LPA 3B

LPA 3C

LPA 3D

LPA 4A

LPA 4B

LPA 4C

LPA 4D

Power Conversion Shelf

(–48 V BTS Only)

AMR

PS 4

PS 5

PS 6

PS 7

PS 8

PS 9

Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

A-20

Notes

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Appendix B: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information

Appendix Content

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PN Offset Background B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PN Offset Usage B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information

May 2000 B-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

PN Offset Background

All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz

CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh

code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of

PN sequences unique to each sector.

Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted

from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize

to the next strongest sector.

The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBX2s, where the

corresponding I & Q registers reside.

The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)

basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of

this information is found in Table B-1.

PN Offset Usage

Only the 14–chip delay is currently in use. It is important to determine

the RF chip delay to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can be

done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on”

when the MCC was downloaded with “image data”. The FineTxAdj

value is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately

20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS–97

specifications.

If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has

been set for the 14 chip table.

CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL

or HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If

necessary, convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal

before comparing them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.

IMPORTANT

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

B-2

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

0 17523 23459 4473 5BA3

1 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D

2 4700 17398 125C 43F6

3 14406 26333 3846 66DD

4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB

5 17025 2256 4281 08D0

6 14745 18651 3999 48DB

7 2783 1094 0ADF 0446

8 5832 21202 16C8 52D2

9 12407 13841 3077 3611

10 31295 31767 7A3F 7C17

11 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA

12 18523 30999 485B 7917

13 29920 22420 74E0 5794

14 25184 20168 6260 4EC8

15 26282 12354 66AA 3042

16 30623 11187 779F 2BB3

17 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A

18 23026 10395 59F2 289B

19 20019 28035 4E33 6D83

20 4050 27399 0FD2 6B07

21 1557 22087 0615 5647

22 30262 2077 7636 081D

23 18000 13758 4650 35BE

24 20056 11778 4E58 2E02

25 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD7

26 17437 7184 441D 1C10

27 17438 2362 441E 093A

28 5102 25840 13EE 64F0

29 9302 12177 2456 2F91

30 17154 10402 4302 28A2

31 5198 1917 144E 077D

32 4606 17708 11FE 452C

33 24804 10630 60E4 2986

34 17180 6812 431C 1A9C

35 10507 14350 290B 380E

36 10157 10999 27AD 2AF7

37 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB

38 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C

39 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA

40 10030 2010 272E 07DA

41 16984 25936 4258 6550

42 14225 28531 3791 6F73

43 26519 11952 6797 2EB0

44 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB

45 30100 25589 7594 63F5

46 7922 11345 1EF2 2C51

47 14199 28198 3777 6E26

48 17637 13947 44E5 367B

49 23081 8462 5A29 210E

50 5099 9595 13EB 257B

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

May 2000 B-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E

52 7114 14672 1BCA 3950

53 7699 29415 1E13 72E7

54 19339 20610 4B8B 5082

55 28212 6479 6E34 194F

56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD

57 19715 18426 4D03 47FA

58 14901 22726 3A35 58C6

59 20160 5247 4EC0 147F

60 22249 29953 56E9 7501

61 26582 5796 67D6 16A4

62 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD

63 15127 4528 3B17 11B0

64 15274 5415 3BAA 1527

65 23149 10294 5A6D 2836

66 16340 17046 3FD4 4296

67 27052 7846 69AC 1EA6

68 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A

69 10620 13814 297C 35F6

70 15978 16854 3E6A 41D6

71 27966 795 6D3E 031B

72 12479 9774 30BF 262E

73 1536 24291 0600 5EE3

74 3199 3172 0C7F 0C64

75 4549 2229 11C5 08B5

76 17888 21283 45E0 5323

77 13117 16905 333D 4209

78 7506 7062 1D52 1B96

79 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C

80 31109 25575 7985 63E7

81 29755 14244 743B 37A4

82 26711 28053 6857 6D95

83 20397 30408 4FAD 76C8

84 18608 5094 48B0 13E6

85 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E

86 23168 7159 5A80 1BF7

87 23466 174 5BAA 00AE

88 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA

89 25798 2320 64C6 0910

90 28134 23113 6DE6 5A49

91 28024 23985 6D78 5DB1

92 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C

93 21508 1826 5404 0722

94 26338 30853 66E2 7885

95 17186 15699 4322 3D53

96 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D

97 3908 25000 0F44 61A8

98 25390 18163 632E 46F3

99 27891 12555 6CF3 310B

100 9620 8670 2594 21DE

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

B-4

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

101 6491 1290 195B 050A

102 16876 4407 41EC 1137

103 17034 1163 428A 048B

104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7

105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55

106 8382 8978 20BE 2312

107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB

108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A

109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE

110 15682 6222 3D42 184E

111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74

112 8521 25094 2149 6206

113 30232 23380 7618 5B54

114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE

115 27116 22821 69EC 5925

116 4238 31634 108E 7B92

117 5128 4403 1408 1133

118 14846 689 39FE 02B1

119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5

120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5

121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3

122 13811 22338 35F3 5742

123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E

124 1213 22096 04BD 5650

125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60

126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7

127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD

128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8

129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880

130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE

131 594 13555 0252 34F3

132 25804 8789 64CC 2255

133 31013 24821 7925 60F5

134 32585 21068 7F49 524C

135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93

136 17231 5321 434F 14C9

137 31554 551 7B42 0227

138 8764 12115 223C 2F53

139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326

140 13428 1991 3474 07C7

141 17658 14404 44FA 3844

142 13475 17982 34A3 463E

143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E

144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A

145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F

146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36

147 1377 29094 0561 71A6

148 28654 653 6FEE 028D

149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3

150 16770 23588 4182 5C24

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

May 2000 B-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E

152 25685 31060 6455 7954

153 21356 30875 536C 789B

154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8

155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1

156 22898 9586 5972 2572

157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8

158 30010 30389 753A 76B5

159 2365 7298 093D 1C82

160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6

161 29740 23137 742C 5A61

162 5665 24597 1621 6015

163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05

164 1680 7764 0690 1E54

165 25861 14518 6505 38B6

166 25712 21634 6470 5482

167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A

168 26887 26454 6907 6756

169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42

170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A

171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F

172 31555 758 7B43 02F6

173 29171 16528 71F3 4090

174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97

175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0

176 30270 17698 763E 4522

177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5

178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA

179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F

180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78

181 15873 26696 3E01 6848

182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B

183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7

184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6

185 22977 9737 59C1 2609

186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6

187 10637 30643 298D 77B3

188 25454 13230 636E 33AE

189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9

190 6368 2055 18E0 0807

191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F

192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC

193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD

194 889 6074 0379 17BA

195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D

196 20520 15880 5028 3E08

197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93

198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA

199 21639 816 5487 0330

200 31120 22309 7990 5725

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

B-6

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

201 3698 29563 0E72 737B

202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316

203 17429 10460 4415 28DC

204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6

205 17808 20277 4590 4F35

206 30068 19988 7574 4E14

207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D

208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5

209 20371 6024 4F93 1788

210 13829 20520 3605 5028

211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF

212 25732 26063 6484 65CF

213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43

214 5187 6614 1443 19D6

215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA

216 28242 5511 6E52 1587

217 6243 17119 1863 42DF

218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0

219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E

220 13256 4660 33C8 1234

221 18472 13881 4828 3639

222 25945 16819 6559 41B3

223 31051 6371 794B 18E3

224 1093 24673 0445 6061

225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7

226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719

227 29833 5957 7489 1745

228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D

229 24813 22155 60ED 568B

230 47 15050 002F 3ACA

231 3202 16450 0C82 4042

232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB

233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0

234 25297 17153 62D1 4301

235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9

236 28519 30581 6F67 7775

237 4991 3600 137F 0E10

238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001

239 17728 671 4540 029F

240 14415 20774 384F 5126

241 30976 24471 7900 5F97

242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD

243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC

244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE

245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521

246 8307 26143 2073 661F

247 12918 13359 3276 342F

248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A

249 24873 13747 6129 35B3

250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

May 2000 B-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

251 13904 1056 3650 0420

252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585

253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF

254 16820 4951 41B4 1357

255 22479 749 57CF 02ED

256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3

257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1

258 19332 2358 4B84 0936

259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE

260 14698 31198 396A 79DE

261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB

262 30475 8862 770B 229E

263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7

264 1912 7443 0778 1D13

265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E

266 15705 25093 3D59 6205

267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB

268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F

269 16779 32545 418B 7F21

270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8

271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77

272 8322 10378 2082 288A

273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9

274 26934 5125 6936 1405

275 18806 12528 4976 30F0

276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF

277 9245 20959 241D 51DF

278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0

279 18684 26453 48FC 6755

280 8220 29421 201C 72ED

281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB

282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B

283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC

284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4

285 12417 26028 3081 65AC

286 30901 29852 78B5 749C

287 9366 14978 2496 3A82

288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96

289 21458 25143 53D2 6237

290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE

291 8999 5336 2327 14D8

292 26718 21885 685E 557D

293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051

294 27961 30097 6D39 7591

295 28465 21877 6F31 5575

296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25

297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC

298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC

299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567

300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

B-8

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

301 17418 30173 440A 75DD

302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B

303 52 5371 0034 14FB

304 27254 10242 6A76 2802

305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94

306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A

307 377 19550 0179 4C5E

308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2

309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1

310 26629 10898 6805 2A92

311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53

312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13

313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE

314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7

315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0

316 25560 4381 63D8 111D

317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32

318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97

319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB

320 26334 9037 66DE 234D

321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62

322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF

323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F

324 4244 16872 1094 41E8

325 8499 9072 2133 2370

326 9362 12966 2492 32A6

327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6

328 30957 25118 78ED 621E

329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8

330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49

331 1153 20983 0481 51F7

332 29304 12372 7278 3054

333 6041 13948 1799 367C

334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B

335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8

336 10096 17354 2770 43CA

337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB

338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A

339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D

340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD

341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743

342 25501 10346 639D 286A

343 4489 13200 1189 3390

344 31011 30402 7923 76C2

345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F

346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A

347 11846 21398 2E46 5396

348 30331 31104 767B 7980

349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0

350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

May 2000 B-9

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

351 29572 5578 7384 15CA

352 13173 25731 3375 6483

353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6

354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C

355 12083 31098 2F33 797A

356 22822 16408 5926 4018

357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA

358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F

359 10205 14732 27DD 398C

360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8

361 22098 1476 5652 05C4

362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD

363 4408 21118 1138 527E

364 102 22198 0066 56B6

365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E

366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B

367 26967 25802 6957 64CA

368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0

369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38

370 655 24248 028F 5EB8

371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7

372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72

373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452

374 8535 1806 2157 070E

375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B

376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68

377 21538 25755 5422 649B

378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A

379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB

380 14717 29096 397D 71A8

381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE

382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95

383 5008 25525 1390 63B5

384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1

385 22175 28855 569F 70B7

386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC

387 22546 20373 5812 4F95

388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD

389 133 26155 0085 662B

390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D

391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6

392 1397 21479 0575 53E7

393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA

394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37

395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C

396 5904 20626 1710 5092

397 24341 423 5F15 01A7

398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77

399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1

400 1862 10818 0746 2A42

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

B-10

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22

402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A

403 12589 14629 312D 3925

404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7

405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677

406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40

407 17000 29492 4268 7334

408 21913 5719 5599 1657

409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3

410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C

411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417

412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D

413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6

414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6

415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72

416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102

417 17435 9075 441B 2373

418 18527 32265 485F 7E09

419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67

420 18783 17434 495F 441A

421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92

422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D

423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC

424 10004 25384 2714 6328

425 13459 18908 3493 49DC

426 13383 25816 3447 64D8

427 28930 4661 7102 1235

428 4860 31115 12FC 798B

429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B

430 24161 1311 5E61 051F

431 20067 16471 4E63 4057

432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B

433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0

434 28743 21062 7047 5246

435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA

436 249 10141 00F9 279D

437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46

438 29682 22141 73F2 567D

439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C

440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724

441 26706 30663 6852 77C7

442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C

443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4

444 5762 10228 1682 27F4

445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0

446 21882 18045 557A 467D

447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361

448 206 27066 00CE 69BA

449 28798 13740 707E 35AC

450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

May 2000 B-11

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

451 13463 3684 3497 0E64

452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3

453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2

454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5

455 23429 9816 5B85 2658

456 12990 4444 32BE 115C

457 12421 5664 3085 1620

458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE

459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80

460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0

461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8

462 30109 29971 759D 7513

463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51

464 4862 16910 12FE 420E

465 14091 20739 370B 5103

466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF

467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213

468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F

469 21379 10072 5383 2758

470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57

471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64

472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0

473 10147 29799 27A3 7467

474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8

475 17359 263 43CF 0107

476 13248 24734 33C0 609E

477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7

478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A

479 10345 25116 2869 621C

480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5

481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940

482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F

483 8808 28728 2268 7038

484 12744 25092 31C8 6204

485 11618 22601 2D62 5849

486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7

487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD

488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE

489 31892 17739 7C94 454B

490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163

491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA

492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2

493 18208 16870 4720 41E6

494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23

495 21901 18400 558D 47E0

496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47

497 18994 1937 4A32 0791

498 13608 17963 3528 462B

499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E

500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A

. . . continued on next page

Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

B-12

Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn

14–Chip Delay

Pilot I Q I Q

PN (Dec.) (Hex.)

501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48

502 23380 29989 5B54 7525

503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E

504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB

505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF

506 14473 28919 3889 70F7

507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C

508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104

509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A

510 1058 2224 0422 08B0

511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix

Appendix Content

Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Usage & Background C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix

May 2000 C-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Usage & Background

Periodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re–optimization of

specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is

included in the following tables.

Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in

the tables below must be performed anytime an RF cable

associated with it is replaced.

IMPORTANT

BTS Frame

Table C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS

Item Replaced Optimize:

C–CCP Shelf All sector TX and RX paths to all

Combined CDMA Channel Processor

(C–CCP) shelves.

Multicoupler/

Preselector Card The three or six affected sector RX paths for

the C–CCP shelf in the BTS frames.

Preselector I/O All sector RX paths.

BBX2 board RX and TX paths of the affected C–CCP

shelf / BBX2 board.

CIO Card All RX and TX paths of the affected

CDMA carrier.

Any LPA Module The affected sector TX path.

LPA Backplane The affected sector TX path.

LPA Filter The affected sector TX path.

Ancillary Frame

Item Replaced Optimize:

Directional Coupler All affected sector RX and TX paths to all

BTS frame shelves.

Site filter All affected RX sector paths in all shelves

in all BTS frames.

Any RFDS component

or TSU. The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths

(MONFWD/GENFWD).

. . . continued on next page

Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

C-2

Inter-frame Cabling

Optimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cabling

between BTS frames.

Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling

Item Replaced Optimize:

Ancillary frame to BTS

frame (RX) cables The affected sector/antenna RX

paths.

BTS frame to ancillary frame

(TX) cables The affected sector/antenna TX paths.

Detailed Optimization/ATP

Test Matrix

Table C-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be

performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It

is also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMF

until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.

The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.

Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line

is indicated in Table C-3. It is meant to be used as a

guideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar

enough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to

understand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, and

BTS site preparation will be required before performing the

Table # procedures referenced.

IMPORTANT

Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directional

couplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibration

audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TX

path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to be

repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting is

warranted.

Whenever any C–CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that

only power to the C–CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the

breaker supplying that shelf.

Whenever any DISTRIBUTION BACKPLANE is replaced it is assumed

that the power to the entire RFM frame is removed and the Preselector

I/O is replaced. The modem frame should be brought up as if it were a

new installation.

. . . continued on next page

Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued

May 2000 C-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

If any significant change in signal level results from any

component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow

paths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TX

calibration audit command.

NOTE

When the CIO is replaced, the C–CCP shelf remains powered up. The

BBX2 boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their

original slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX

calibration audits should then be performed.

. . . continued on next page

Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

C-4

Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix

Doc

Tbl

#page

Description

Directional Coupler (RX)

Directional Coupler (TX)

RX Filter

RX Cables

TX Cables

Multicoupler/Preselector

CIO

C–CCP Backplane

BBX2

MCC24/MCC8E

CSM

LFR/HSO

GPS

GLI2

LPA

LPA Filter Bandpass

Power Converters (See Note)

SWITCH CARD

LPA Combiner Filter 2:1

LPA Combiner Filter 4:1

LPA Backplane

Table 2-1 2-2

Initial Boards/Modules

Install, Preliminary

Operations, CDF Site

Equipage; etc.

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

Table 2-2

Table 2-5 2-5

2-13 DC Power Pre-Test

Physical Inspect D D

Table 2-7 2-14 Initial Power-up D D

Table 3-8 3-16 Ping the Processors D D D D D D

Table 3-11 3-23 Download/Enable MGLI2s D D

Table 3-11 3-23 Download/Enable GLIs D D

Table 3-12 3-24 Download CSMs D D D

Table 3-12 3-24 Download MCCs, D D D

Table 3-12 3-24 Download BBX2s D D

Table 3-14 3-26 Enable CSMs D D

Table 3-15 3-27 Enable MCC24s D D

Table 3-18 3-32 GPS Initialization /

Verification D D D

Table 3-19 3-36 LFR Initialization /

Verification D D

Table 3-20 3-38 HSO

Initialization/Verification D D

Table 3-33 3-65 TX Path Calibration D D D

Table 3-34 3-66 Download Offsets to

BBX2 D D D

Table 3-35 3-68 TX Path Calibration Audit D D DDD DD DDDD

Table 4-1 4-3 Spectral Purity TX Mask

ATP DD DD DDDD

Table 4-1 4-3 Waveform Quality (rho)

ATP D D D D D D D D D D

Table 4-1 4-3 Pilot Time Offset ATP D D D D D D D D D D

Table 4-1 4-3 Code Domain Power /

Noise Floor DDD

Table 4-1 4-3 FER Test DDDDD

NOTE

Replace power converters one card at a time so that power to the C–CCP or LPA shelf is not lost. If power to

the C–CCP shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations

Appendix Content

Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations D-1. . . . . . . . .

Usage & Background D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations

May 2000 D-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Usage & Background

Table D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain

channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the

BBX2 Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant

RF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the

table. The table assumes that the BBX2 Bay Level Offset (BLO) values

have been calculated.

As an illustration, consider a BBX2 keyed up to produce a CDMA

carrier with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled).

Pilot gain is set to 262. In this case, the BBX2 Gain Set Point is shown

to correlate exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44

dBm output range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).

Table D-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)

dBm'

Gainb

44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

541 – – – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3

533 – – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2

525 – – – – – – 44 43 42 41 40 39

517 – – – – – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9

509 – – – – – – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8

501 – – – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6

493 – – – – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5

485 – – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4

477 – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2

469 – – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1

461 – – – – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9

453 – – – – – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8

445 – – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6

437 – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4

429 – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3

421 – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1

413 – – – – 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

405 – – – – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8

397 – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6

389 – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4

. . . continued on next page

Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

D-2

Table D-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)

dBm'

Gainb

333435363738394041424344

381 – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3

374 – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1

366 – – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9

358 – – – 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7

350 – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5

342 – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3

334 – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1

326 – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9

318 – – 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7

310 – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5

302 – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2

294 – 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34

286 – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8

278 – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5

270 – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3

262 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

254 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 –

246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 –

238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 –

230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 – –

222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 – –

214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 – –

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Appendix E: CDMA Operating Frequency Information

Appendix Content

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North

American PCS Bands E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1900 MHz PCS Channels E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

800 MHz CDMA Channels E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean Bands E-6. . . .

1700 MHz PCS Channels E-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calculating 1700 MHz Center Frequencies E-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American

PCS Bands

May 2000 E-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Introduction

Programming of each of the BTS BBX2 synthesizers is performed by the

BTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the

transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for

each BBX2.

1900 MHz PCS Channels

Figure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS

1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or

non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per

customer operating system).

Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)

FREQ (MHz)

RX TX

275

1175

CHANNEL

1863.75

925

1851.2525

1871.25425

675 1883.75

1896.25

1908.75

1943.75

1931.25

1951.25

1963.75

1976.25

1988.75

. . . continued on next page

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American

Bands – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

E-2

Calculating 1900 MHz Center

Frequencies

Table E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating

channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding

transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for

channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:

STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#

Example: Channel 262

TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz

SRX = TX – 80

Example: Channel 262

RX = 1943.10 – 80 = 1863.10 MHz

Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency

plan.

Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The

actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on

both sides of the carrier.

Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and

the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).

Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

25 0019 1931.25 1851.25

50 0032 1932.50 1852.50

75 004B 1933.75 1853.75

100 0064 1935.00 1855.00

125 007D 1936.25 1856.25

150 0096 1937.50 1857.50

175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75

200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00

225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25

250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50

275 0113 1943.75 1863.75

300 012C 1945.00 1865.00

325 0145 1946.25 1866.25

350 015E 1947.50 1867.50

375 0177 1948.75 1868.75

400 0190 1950.00 1870.00

425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25

450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50

475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75

500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00

525 020D 1956.25 1876.25

550 0226 1957.50 1877.50

575 023F 1958.75 1878.75

. . . continued on next page

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American

Bands – continued

May 2000 E-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

600 0258 1960.00 1880.00

625 0271 1961.25 1881.25

650 028A 1962.50 1882.50

675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75

700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00

725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25

750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50

775 0307 1968.75 1888.75

800 0320 1970.00 1890.00

825 0339 1971.25 1891.25

850 0352 1972.50 1892.50

875 036B 1973.75 1893.75

900 0384 1975.00 1895.00

925 039D 1976.25 1896.25

950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50

975 03CF 1978.75 1898.75

1000 03E8 1980.00 1900.00

1025 0401 1981.25 1901.25

1050 041A 1982.50 1902.50

1075 0433 1983.75 1903.75

1100 044C 1985.00 1905.00

1125 0465 1986.25 1906.25

1150 047E 1987.50 1807.50

1175 0497 1988.75 1908.75

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American

Bands – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

E-4

800 MHz CDMA Channels

Figure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular

telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or

non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per

customer operating system).

Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)

RX FREQ

(MHz)

991

1023

333

334

666

667

716

717

799

CHANNEL

OVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDS

OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS

824.040

825.000

825.030

834.990

835.020

844.980

845.010

846.480

846.510

848.970

869.040

870.000

870.030

879.990

880.020

889.980

890.010

891.480

891.510

893.970

TX FREQ

(MHz)

1013

694

689

311

356

644

739

777

CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BAND

CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND

FW00402

Calculating 800 MHz Center

Frequencies

Table E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating

channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding

transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for

channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:

SChannels 1–777

TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#

Example: Channel 262

TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz

SChannels 1013–1023

TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)

Example: Channel 1015

TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHz

SRX = TX – 45 MHz

Example: Channel 262

RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHz

Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

1 0001 870.0300 825.0300

25 0019 870.7500 825.7500

. . . continued on next page

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American

Bands – continued

May 2000 E-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

50 0032 871.5000 826.5000

75 004B 872.2500 827.2500

100 0064 873.0000 828.0000

125 007D 873.7500 828.7500

150 0096 874.5000 829.5000

175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500

200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000

225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500

250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000

275 0113 878.2500 833.2500

300 012C 879.0000 834.0000

325 0145 879.7500 834.7500

350 015E 880.5000 835.5000

375 0177 881.2500 836.2500

400 0190 882.0000 837.0000

425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500

450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000

475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500

500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000

525 020D 885.7500 840.7500

550 0226 886.5000 841.5000

575 023F 887.2500 842.2500

600 0258 888.0000 843.0000

625 0271 888.7500 843.7500

650 028A 889.5000 844.5000

675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500

700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000

725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500

750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000

775 0307 893.2500 848.2500

NOTE

Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.

1013 03F5 869.7000 824.7000

1023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean Bands

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

E-6

1700 MHz PCS Channels

Figure E-3 shows the valid channels for the 1700 MHz PCS frequency

spectrum. The CDMA channels are spaced in increments of 25 (25, 50,

75, . . . 575) across the CDMA band.

FREQ (MHz)

RX TX

575

CHANNEL 1751.2525

1778.75

1841.25

1868.75

Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)

. . . continued on next page

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean

Bands – continued

May 2000 E-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Calculating 1700 MHz Center

Frequencies Center frequency for channels may be calculated as follows:

Direction Formula Example

TX 1840 + (0.05 * Channel#) Channel: 1840 + (0.05 + 25) = 1841.25

RX 1750 + (0.05 * Channel#) Channel: 1750 + (0.05 + 25) = 1751.25

– Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system

frequency plan.

– Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The

actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard

band on both sides of the carrier

– Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA

carrier and the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center to

center).

Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands)

Channel Number

Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)

Center Frequency

25 0019 1841.25 1751.25

50 0032 1842.50 1752.50

75 004B 1843.75 1753.75

100 0064 1845.00 1755.00

125 007D 1846.25 1756.25

150 0096 1847.50 1757.50

175 00AF 1848.75 1758.75

200 00C8 1850.00 1760.00

225 00E1 1851.25 1761.25

250 00FA 1852.50 1762.50

275 0113 1853.75 1763.75

300 012C 1855.00 1765.00

325 0145 1856.25 1766.25

350 015E 1857.50 1767.50

375 0177 1858.75 1768.75

400 0190 1860.00 1770.00

425 01A9 1861.25 1771.25

450 01C2 1862.50 1772.50

475 01DB 1863.75 1773.75

500 01F4 1865.00 1775.00

525 020D 1866.25 1776.25

550 0226 1867.50 1777.50

575 023F 1868.75 1778.75

CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean PCS

Bands – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

E-8

Notes

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Appendix F: PCS Interface Setup for Manual Testing

Appendix Content

Test Equipment Setup F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Warm up F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prerequisites F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP8921A System Connectivity Test F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Cable Calibration using HP8921 with HP PCS

Interface (HP83236) F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing F-7. . . . . . . .

Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Test Equipment Setup

May 2000 F-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Purpose

This section covers other test equipment and peripherals not covered in

Chapter 3. Procedures for the manual testing are covered here, along

with procedures to calibrate the TX and RX cables using the signal

generator and spectrum analyzer.

Equipment Warm up

Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes

prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This

assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization

accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up, hardware/

firmware audit, and BTS download counts as warm-up

time.)

IMPORTANT

If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter)

has been replaced, re-calibration must be performed.

Failure to do so could introduce measurement errors,

resulting in incorrect measurements and degradation to

system performance.

CAUTION

Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent

test equipment) must be performed at the site before

calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment

after it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a

minimum of 60 minutes.

IMPORTANT

Test Equipment Setup – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

F-2

Prerequisites

Prior to performing any of these procedures, all preparations for

preparing the LMF, updating LMF files, and any other pre-calibration

procedures, as stated in Chapter 3, must have been completed.

HP8921A System Connectivity

Test

Follow the steps in Table F-1 to verify that the connections between the

PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct, and cables are intact. The

software also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.

Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system

controllers, from the system before running the

connectivity software.

IMPORTANT

Table F-1: System Connectivity

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

– Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a

minimum of 60 minutes.

1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.

2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.

3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.

4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select by pressing the cursor control knob.

In the Choices selection box, select Card.

5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select by pressing the cursor control knob.

In the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.

6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it.

The software will prompt you through the connectivity setup.

7When the test is complete, position the cursor on STOP TEST and select it; OR press the [K5]

pushbutton.

8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.

Test Equipment Setup – continued

May 2000 F-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Manual Cable Calibration

using HP8921 with HP PCS

Interface (HP83236)

Perform the procedure in Table F-2 to calibrate the test equipment using

the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the

HP83236 PCS Interface.

This calibration method must be executed with great care.

Some losses are measured close to the minimum limit of

the power meter sensor (–30 dBm).

NOTE

Prerequisites

Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:

STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable

calibration.

STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.

Refer to Figure F-1 for location of the components on the PCS Interface

and Communications Test Set.

Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step Action

NOTE

Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.

1Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot (see Figure F-1).

2Press the Preset pushbutton.

3 Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.

4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select

CARD.

5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select

MANUAL.

6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.

7If using HP 83236A:

Set channel number=<chan#>:

– Position cursor at Channel

Number and select it.

– Enter the chan# using the numeric

keypad; press [Enter] and the

screen will go blank.

– When the screen reappears, the

chan# will be displayed on the

channel number line.

If using HP 83236B:

Set channel frequency:

– Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.

– Select User Defined Frequency.

– Go Back to Previous Menu.

– Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and

enter actual RX frequency.

– Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and

enter actual TX frequency.

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Setup – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

F-4

Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step Action

8Set RF Generator level:

– Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.

– Enter –10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.

– When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.

9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:

– Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it

– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.

– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].

10 Select Back to Previous Menu.

11 Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:

Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:

– Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.

– Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.

– Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level

(1850 – 1910 MHz for 1.9 GHz or 1750 – 1780 for 1.7 GHz).

– Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.

12 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.

13 Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.

14 On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.

15 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.

16 Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.

NOTE

The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude

by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.

17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.

* IMPORTANT

The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB

should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter

before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the

power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.

18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each

component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor (see Figure F-1,

Setups A, B, or C). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.

SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = –1.4 dB

(B) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB

(B) Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Setup – continued

May 2000 F-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)

Step Action

19 After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test

setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:

SExample: Total test setup loss = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.

This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.

20 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.

21 Select Continue (K2).

22 Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.

23 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.

24 Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields

not indicated remain at default):

SVerify the GPIB (HP–IB) address:

– under To Screen, select More

– select IO CONFIG

– Set HP–IB Adrs to 18

– set Mode to Talk&Lstn

SVerify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)

– Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to

the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.

– Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq

25 Refer to Table 3-28 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.

Test Equipment Setup – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

F-6

(A)

(C)

POWER

SENSOR

(A)

POWER

SENSOR

(C)

30 dB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

150 W

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

POWER

SENSOR

(B)

POWER

SENSOR

(B)

MEMORY

CARD

SLOT

20 dB / 20 WATT

ATTENUATOR

FW00292

Figure F-1: Calibrating Test Setup Components

Test Equipment Setup – continued

May 2000 F-7

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

HP PCS Interface Test Equipment

Setup for Manual Testing

Follow the procedure in Table F-3 to setup the HP PCS Interface Box for

manual testing.

Table F-3: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing

nStep Action

NOTE

Verify GPIB controller is turned off.

1Insert HP83236B Manual Control/System card into the memory card slot.

2 Under Screen Controls, press the [TESTS] push-button to display the TESTS (Main Menu)

screen.

3Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select. In the Choices selection box, select

CARD.

4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select. In the Choices selection box, select

MANUAL.

5Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select OR press the K1 push-button.

6Set channel number=<chan#>:

– Position cursor at Channel Number and select.

– Enter the chan# using the numeric keypad and then press [Enter] (the screen will blank).

– When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the channel number line.

* IMPORTANT

If using a TMPC with Tower Top Amplifier (TTA) skip Step 7.

7SSet RF Generator level= –119 dBm + Cal factor

Example: –119 dBm + 2 dB = –117 dBm

SContinue with Step 9 (skip Step 8).

8Set RF Generator level= –116 dBm + Cal factor.

Example: –116 dBm + 2 dB = –114 dBm

9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dB:

– Position cursor at RF Generator Level and select.

– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select.

– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].

10 Select Back to Previous Menu.

11 Select Quit, then select Yes.

Test Equipment Setup – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

F-8

Calibrating Test Cable Setup

using Advantest R3465

Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.

NOTE

Perform the procedure in Table F-4 to calibrate the test cable setup using

the Advantest R3465. Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and

calibration must be performed at both the TX and RX frequencies.

Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465

Step Action

* IMPORTANT

– This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and

stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.

1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display

2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.

3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key

4Select the Setup CRT menu key

5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters

NOTE

Fields not listed remain at default

Generator Mode: SIGNAL

Link: FORWARD

Level Unit: dBm

CalCorrection: ON

Level Offset: OFF

6Select the return CRT menu key

7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area

8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys

9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.

10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it

OFF.

11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.

12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.

13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L

CDMA Test Source Unit.

14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.

. . . continued on next page

Test Equipment Setup – continued

May 2000 F-9

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465

Step Action

15 Record the power meter reading ________________________

16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.

* IMPORTANT

The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB

should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before

connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the

power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.

17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each

component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-2, “Setups

A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.

Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = –0.5 dB

(B) 2nd Test Cable = –1.4 dB

(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB

18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.

19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:

Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB

This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.

20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area

21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency

22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.

23 Refer to Table 3-28 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.

Test Equipment Setup – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

F-10

POWER

SENSOR

20 DB / 2 WATT

ATTENUATOR

(A)

(C)

POWER

SENSOR

(D)

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

(C)

100 W

NON–RADIATING

RF LOAD

POWER

SENSOR

RF OUT

POWER

SENSOR

& (B)

FW00320

Figure F-2: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Appendix G: VSWR

Appendix Content

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Purpose G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test equipment G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Setup – HP Test Set G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Setup – Advantest Test Set G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR

May 2000 G-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Purpose

The following procedures will verify that the Voltage Standing Wave

Ratio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall within

acceptable limits. The tests will be performed on all antennas in a

sequential manner (i.e., ANT 1, then ANT 2) until all antennas/feedlines

have been verified.

These procedures should be performed periodically by measuring each

respective antenna’s VSWR (reflected power) to verify that the antenna

system is within acceptable limits. This will ensure continued peak

system performance.

The antenna VSWR will be calculated at the CDMA carrier frequency

assigned to each antenna. Record and verify that they meet the test

specification of less than or equal to 1.5:1.

It is recommended that the installer be familiar with the

following procedure in its entirety before beginning the

actual procedure. Ensure that the entire site is currently not

in service.

IMPORTANT

This test is used to test RX antennas by substituting RX

frequencies for TX frequencies.

NOTE

Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests

only after first verifying that the RF cabling configuration required to

interconnect the BTS frames and antennas meet requirements called out

in the BTS Installation Manual.

Test equipment

The following pieces of test equipment will be required to perform this

test:

SLMF

SDirectional coupler

SCommunications test set

Prior to performing antenna tests, insure that no CDMA

BBX channels are keyed. Failure to do so could result in

personal injury or serious equipment damage.

WARNING

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

G-2

Equipment Setup – HP Test

Set

Follow the steps in Table G-1 to set up test equipment required to

measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.

Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set

Step Action HP TEST SET

1If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-5 to set up test

equipment & interface the LMF computer to the BTS.

2For manual VSWR testing, using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-1 (1700/1900 MHz)

or Figure G-2 (800 MHz).

– Connect the communications test set RF OUT ONLY port to the INPUT port of the directional

coupler.

– Connect the RF IN/OUT port of the communication test set to the reverse (RVS) port on the

directional coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 ohm load.

– Install the antenna feed line to the output port on the directional coupler.

NOTE

Manual Communications Analyzer test setup (fields not indicated remain at default):

SSet screen to RF GEN.

– For 1900 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier

between 1930–1990 MHz for TX and 1850–1910 MHz for RX. For 800 MHz systems, set the

RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869–894 MHz for TX and

824–849 MHz for RX. For 1700 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of

actual CDMA carrier between 1840–1870 MHz for TX and 1750–1780 MHz for RX.

– Set Amplitude to –30 dBm.

– Set Output Port to RF OUT.

– Set AFGen1 & AFGen2 to OFF.

3Remove the antenna feed line and install an “RF short” onto the directional coupler output port.

NOTE

Set–up communication test set as follows (fields not indicated remain at default):

SSet screen to SPEC ANL.

– Under Controls, set input port to ANT.

–Set Ref Level to –40 dBm.

– Under Controls, select Main, select Auxiliary.

– Under Controls, select AVG. Set Avg = 20.

4– Record the reference level on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.

– Replace the short with the antenna feedline. Record the reference level on the communications

analyzer and Note for as PA reference.

– Record the difference of the two readings in dB.

. . . continued on next page

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued

May 2000 G-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set

Step HP TEST SETAction

5Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.

Where:

RL(dB) =PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)

PA = Power reflected from antenna

PS = Power reflected from short

A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.

VSWR +ȧ

1)10

1–10

6If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any

in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,

consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement

information.

7Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.

8Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.

Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (1700/1900 MHz)

RF OUT

ONLY

PORT

IN/OUT

PORT

RVS

(REFLECTED)

PORT

FEED LINE TO

ANTENNA

UNDER TEST

RF SHORT

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

OUTPUT

PORT

FWD (INCIDENT)

PORT 50–OHM

TERMINATED LOAD

INPUT

PORT

FW00342

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

G-4

Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz)

FWD (INCIDENT)

PORT 50–OHM

TERMINATED LOAD

RVS

(REFLECTED)

PORT

FEED LINE TO

ANTENNA

UNDER TEST

SHORT

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER OUTPUT

PORT

INPUT

PORT

FW00343

Equipment Setup – Advantest

Test Set

Follow the steps in Table G-2 to set up test equipment required to

measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.

Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set

Step Action ADVANTEST

1If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-5 to set up test

equipment and interface the LMF computer to the BTS.

2For manual VSWR testing using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-3.

– Connect the communications test set RF OUT port to the input port of the directional coupler.

– Connect the INPUT port of the communication test set to the forward port on the directional

coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 ohm load.

– Connect the RF short to the directional coupler output port.

. . . continued on next page

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued

May 2000 G-5

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set

Step ADVANTESTAction

3Preform the following to instruct the calibrated test set to generate a CDMA RF carrier (RVL call)

with all zero longcode at the assigned RX frequency at –10 dBm:

SPush the ADVANCE Measurement key.

SPush the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.

SPush the FREQ Entry key:

– For 1900 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between

1930–1990 MHz for TX and 1850–1910 MHz for RX.

– For 800 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between

869–894 MHz for TX and 824–849 MHz for RX.

– For 1700 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between

1840–1870 MHz for TX and 1750–1780 MHz for RX.

SPush the LEVEL Entry key; set to 0 dBm (by entering 0 and pushing the –dBm key).

SVerify that ON is active in the Output CRT menu key.

SVerify that OFF is active in the Mod CRT menu key.

SPush the CW Measurement key.

SPush the FREQ Entry key.

– Push the more 1/2 CRT menu key.

– Set Preselect CRT menu key to 3.0G.

SPush the Transient Measurement key.

– Push the Tx Power CRT menu key.

– Push the LEVEL entry key (set to 7 dBm by entering 7 and pushing the the dBm key).

– Set Avg Times CRT menu key to ON. Set to 20 (by entering 20 and pushing the Hz ENTER

key).

SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.

4Record the Burst Power display on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.

5Install the antenna feedline to the output port of the directional coupler.

6SPush the Auto Level Set CRT menu key.

SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.

7Record the Burst Power on the communications analyzer and Note as PA level for reference.

Record the difference of the two readings in dBm.

8Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.

Where:

RL(dB) =PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)

PA = Power reflected from antenna

PS = Power reflected from short

A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.

VSWR +ȧ

1)10

1–10

. . . continued on next page

Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

G-6

Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set

Step ADVANTESTAction

9If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any

in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,

consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement

information.

10 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.

11 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.

Figure G-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465

RVS

(REFLECTED)

PORT

FEED LINE TO

ANTENNA

UNDER TEST

SHORT

30 DB

DIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

OUTPUT

PORT

FWD (INCIDENT)

PORT 50–OHM

TERMINATED LOAD

INPUT

PORT

RF OUT

RF IN

FW00332

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Appendix H: Download ROM Code

Appendix Content

Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

Notes

Download ROM Code

May 2000 H-1

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Download ROM Code

ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the

download is started, the device being downloaded changes to

OOS_ROM (blue) and remains OOS_ROM (blue). The same R–level

RAM code must then be downloaded to the device. For example, if

version 2.9.2.1.1 ROM code is downloaded, version 2.9.2.1.1 RAM

code must be downloaded. This procedure includes steps for both the

ROM code download and the RAM code download.

ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code file

must be selected manually. Follow the procedure in Table H-1 to

download ROM code.

Prerequisite

SROM and RAM code files exist for the device to be downloaded.

The R–level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be

the same as the R–level of the ROM code for other devices

in the BTS. R9 ROM code must not be downloaded to a

frame having R8 code, and R8 ROM code must not be

downloaded to a BTS having R9 code. R8 and R9 code

must not be mixed in a BTS. This procedure should only

be used to upgrade replacement devices for a BTS and it

should not be used to upgrade all devices in a BTS. If a

BTS is to be upgraded from R8 to R9, the optimization and

ATP procedures must first be performed with the BTS in

an R8 configuration. The R8 to R9 upgrade should then be

done by the CBSC.

CAUTION

Table H-1: Download ROM Code

Step Action

NOTE

ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code file must be selected manually.

1Click on the device to be downloaded.

2Click on the Device menu.

3Click on the Status menu item.

A status report window appears.

4Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.

5Click on the OK button to dismiss the status report window.

6Click on the Download Code Manual menu item.

A file selection window appears.

. . . continued on next page

Download ROM Code – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

H-2

Table H-1: Download ROM Code

Step Action

7Double–click on the version folder that contains the desired ROM code file.

8Double–click on the Code folder.

A list of ROM and RAM code files is displayed.

! CAUTION

A ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) needs to be chosen. The

hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4. Unpredictable results

can happen and the device may be damaged (may have to be replaced) if a ROM code file with wrong

binary type is downloaded.

9Choose a ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type).

The hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4.

10 Click on the ROM code file that matches the device type and HW Bin Type (e.g., bbx_rom.bin.0604

for a BBX having a HW Bin Type of 0604).

The file should be highlighted.

11 Click on the Load button.

A status report window displays the result of the download.

12 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.

13 Click on the Util menu.

14 Select the Tools menu item.

15 Click on the Update NextLoad menu item.

16 Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download.

17 Click on the Save button.

A pop–up message indicates that the CDF file has been updated.

18 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.

19 Click on the device that was downloaded with ROM code.

20 Click on the Device menu.

21 Click on the Download Code menu item to download RAM code.

A status report window displays the result of the download.

NOTE

Data is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the

Download Data procedure to download data to other device types after they have been upgraded.

22 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.

The downloaded device should be OOS_RAM (yellow) unless it is a GLI in which case it should be

INS (green).

23 Click on the device that was downloaded.

24 Click on the Device menu.

25 Click on the Status menu item.

Verify that the status report window displays the correct ROM and RAM version numbers.

. . . continued on next page

Download ROM Code – continued

May 2000 H-3

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP

Table H-1: Download ROM Code

Step Action

26 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.

Download ROM Code – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000

H-4

Notes

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Index-1

Index

Numbers

10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-7

LMF to BTS connection, 3-5

2–way Splitter, 1-10

3C–PC–COMBO CBL, 1-7

ACTIVE LED

GLI, 6-23

MCC, 6-25

Advantest R3465, 3-39

Calibrating Test Cable, F-8

Alarm Connector Location/Pin Numbering SC

4850/4850E, 3-81

ALARM LED, GLI, 6-23

Alarm Monitor window, 3-80

Alarm Reporting Display, 3-80

All Cal/Audit Test, 3-68, 3-69

AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, test data sheets,

A-17

Ancillary Equipment Frame identification, 1-12

Ancillary frame, when to optimize, C-1

Antenna Map, 3-76

ATP

Code Domain Power, 4-10

Frame Error Rate (FER), 4-12

generate failure report, 4-13

generate report, 4-13

Pilot Time Offset, 4-9

Report, 4-13

Spectral Purity Transmit Mask, 4-6

test, 4-3

test matrix/detailed optimization, C-2

Test Procedure, 4-3

Waveform Quality (rho), 4-8

Backplane DIP switch settings, 2-3

Bay Level Offset calibration failure, 6-6

BBX

Connector, 6-14

gain set point vs BTS output considerations, D-1

BLO

Calibration, 3-59

Calibration Audit, 3-66

calibration data file, 3-61

Calibration Failure, 6-6

Download, 3-66

BTS

Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-15

LMF connection, 3-5

Logout Procedure, 3-20

system software download, 3-3

test data sheets, redundancy/alarm tests, A-16

when to optimize, C-1

BTS frame

DC Distribution Pre–test, 2-7, 2-9

initial power–up, 2-14

Create CAL File, 3-70

C–CCP Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-13, 6-14

C–CCP Shelf, 1-13

Cable

3C–PC–COMBO CBL, 1-7

GPIB, 1-8

LAN Cable, 1-9

Calibrating, 3-41, 3-52, 3-53

Null Modem, 3-30

Index – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000Index-2

Setting Loss Values, 3-57

Timimg Reference, 1-8

Cable Calibration

HP8921 with HP PCS

Manual, F-3

CAL File, 3-70

Calculating Center Frequencies

1700 MHz, E-7

1900 MHz, E-2

800 MHz, E-4

Calibrating

Cables, 3-52

RX, 3-55

TX, 3-54

Test Equipment, 3-52

Calibrating Test Cable, Advantest R3465, F-8

Calibration

BLO, 3-59

data file, BLO, 3-61

RF Path, Test Equipment Setup, 3-63

RFDS, 3-78

TX Path, 3-60, 3-64

Test Cable Calibration, 1-5

Test Equipment Calibration, 1-5

Calibration Audit Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-7

Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,

6-3

Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-2

Cannot download CODE to any device card, 6-4

Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-4

Cannot ENABLE device, 6-5

Cannot load BLO, 6-7

Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2

Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-9

Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power

measurement, 6-9

Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset

measurement, 6-8

Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-8

CDF

site configuration, 3-2

site equipage verification, 3-3

site type and equipage data information, 2-1

CDI Alarm

with Alarms Test Box, 3-82

without Alarms Test Box, 3-85

Cell Site

equipage verification, 2-1

preliminary operations, 2-1

types, 3-2

Cell Site Data File. See CDF

Channels

1700 MHz, E-6

1900 MHz, E-1

800 MHz, E-4

CIO Connectors, 6-14

Cobra RFDS

external housing, 1-31

RF connector panel detail, 1-31

Code Domain Power, ATP, 4-10

Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement

Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-9

Code Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4

Common power supply verification, 2-13

Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,

Troubleshooting, 6-3

Communications System Analyzer, 1-8

Advantest, 1-8

HP8921A/600, 1-8

CyberTest, 1-8

HP8935 Analyzer, 1-8

Connector Functionality, Backplane,

Troubleshooting, 6-13

Copy CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC, 5-6

Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-6

Copy CDF Files from CBSC, 3-9

Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-6

Copy CAL files to the CBSC, 5-6

CSM

Enable, 3-25

functions, 3-28

LEDs, 3-29

MMI terminal connection, illustration, 3-31

Troubleshooting, 6-11

CSM Clock Source, 3-24, 3-25

Index – continued

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Index-3

CSM frequency verification, 3-30

CyberTest, 3-39

Data Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4

DC Distribution Pre–test

BTS frame detail, 2-7, 2-9

RFDS detail, 2-11

DC Power Pre–test

BTS Frame, 2-5

RFDS, 2-11

DC Power Problems, C–CCP Backplane

Troubleshooting, 6-18

DC/DC Converter, LED Status Combinations, 6-20

Device Enable (INS) Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-5

Digital Control Problems, 6-15

C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-15

Digital Multimeter, 1-8

Directional Coupler, 1-9

Download

BLO, 3-66

BTS, 3-21

BTS system software, 3-3

MGLI, 3-22

Non–MGLI2 Devices, 3-24

E1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-4

Enable

CSMs, 3-25

MCCs, 3-27

Redundant GLIs, 3-27

Enabling Devices, 5-2

Equipment setup, VSWR, HP Test Set, G-2

Ethernet LAN

interconnect diagram, 3-15

Transceiver, 1-6

Ethernet maintenance connector interface, illustration,

3-5

FER test, 4-12

Folder Structure Overview, 3-11, 3-14

Frame Error Rate, 4-5

ATP, 4-12

FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22

Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-9

Frequency Spectrum

Korean PCS (1700 MHz), E-6

North American Cellular Telephone System (800

MHz), E-4

North American PCS (1900 MHz), E-1

Gain set point, BBX, D-1

Generating an ATP Report, 4-13

General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4

Gigatronics Power Meter, 3-39

GLI. See Master (MGLI2) and Slave (SGLI2) Group

Line Interface

GLI Connector, 6-14

GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-14

GPIB Cable, Cable, 1-8

GPS

Initialization/Verification, 3-32

receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5

satellite system, 3-26

Test Equipment Setup, 3-30

Graphical User Interface, 3-6

GUI, 3-6

LMF Hardware Requirements, 1-6

Hewlett–Packard HP 8921, 3-39

Hewlett–Packard HP 8935, 3-39

High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-10

High–impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-9

HP 437B, 3-39

HP 83236A, F-2

HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual

Testing, F-7

HP Test Set, VSWR, G-2

HP83236 , F-3

Index – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000Index-4

HP8921A, System Connectivity Test, F-2

HSO, initialization/verification, 3-38

HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-29

I and Q values, B-1

Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary

operations, 2-1

Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3

Initial power–up

BTS frame, 2-14

RFDS, 2-14

Initialization/Verification

GPS, 3-32

HSO, 3-38

LFR, 3-35

Installation and Update Procedures, 3-9

Intended reader profile, 1-11

Inter–frame cabling, when to optimize, C-2

IS–97 specification, B-1

ISB connectors, 6-13

Isolation, T1/E1 Span, 3-4

Itasca Alarms Test Box, 1-10

LAN

BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-15

Connectors, GLI, 6-24

Tester, 1-10

LED, CSM, 3-29

LED Status, 6-20

BBX2, 6-25

CSM, 6-21

DC/DC Converter, 6-20

GLI, 6-23

LPA, 6-26

MCC, 6-25

LFR

Initialization / Verification, 3-35

receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6

LFR/HSO, Test Equipment Setup, 3-30

LMF, 1-5

Ethernet maintenance connector interface detail,

illustration, 3-5

Termination and Removal, 5-7

to BTS connection, 3-5

LMF Removal, 5-7

Loading Code, 3-21

Logging In, 3-19

Logging Out, 3-20

Logical BTS, 3-6

LPA, test data sheets

convergence, A-8

IM Reduction, A-7

LPA Module LED, 6-26

Manual

layout, 1-1

overview, 1-2

MASTER LED, GLI, 6-23

MCC, Enable, 3-27

MCC/CE, 4-10

MGLI2

board detail, MMI port connections, 5-4

Download, 3-22

Miscellaneous errors, Troubleshooting, 6-5

MMI Connector

CSM, 6-22

GLI, 6-24

MCC, 6-25

Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit, 1-8

Module status indicators, 6-20

Multi–FER test Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-10

NAM, Valid Ranges, 3-75

No AMR control, 6-16

No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-16

No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-18

No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific

GLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-19

Index – continued

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Index-5

No GLI2 Control through span line connection,

Troubleshooting, 6-15

No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-15

No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-17

No or missing span line traffic, 6-16

Non–MGLI2, Download, 3-24

Null Modem Cable, 3-30

Online Help, Help, 1-2

Optimization

Process, 3-1

purpose, 1-3

Optional Test Equipment, 1-9

frequency counter, 1-9

Oscilloscope, 1-10

PA Shelves, 1-13

path

RX, 1-3

TX, 1-3

PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter, LMF to BTS connection,

3-5

Pilot Offset Acceptance test, 4-9

Pilot Time Offset, 4-9

Pin/Signal Information for ARM A Cable, 3-86

Ping, 3-15

PN Offset

programming information, B-1

usage, B-1

PnMask, B-2

Power Input, 6-13

Power Meter, 1-8

Power Meter Communication Failure,

Troubleshooting, 6-2

Power Supply Module Interface, 6-14

Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3

Preliminary operations

cell Site types, 2-1

test data sheets, A-2

Prepare to Leave the Site

external test equipment removal, 5-1

LMF Removal, 5-7

re–connect BTS IFM connector, 5-8

re–connect BTS T1 spans, 5-8

Reestablish OMC–R control, 5-8

Verify T1/E1, 5-8

Product Description, CDMA LMF, 1-2

Pushbuttons and Connectors, GLI, 6-24

PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC, 6-25

PWR/ALM LED

BBX2, 6-25

CSM, 6-21

DC/DC Converter, 6-20

generic, 6-20

MCC, 6-25

Re–connect BTS IFM connector, 5-8

Re–connect BTS T1 Spans, 5-8

Redundant GLIs, Enable, 3-27

Reestablish OMC–R control, 5-8

Reference Distribution Module (RDM) Input/Output,

6-13

Required documents, 1-11

RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-24

Resetting BTS modules, 5-2

Adapters, 1-9

Attenuators, 1-9

Load, 1-9

RF Path Calibration, 3-63

RFDS

Calibration, 3-78

DC Distribution Pre–test, 2-11

Description, 3-71

initial power–up, 2-14

Layout, 1-31

Parameter Settings, 3-72

Set Configuration Data, 3-77

rho test, 4-8

RS–232 to GPIB Interface, RS–232 to GPIB

Interface, 1-7

Index – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000Index-6

Rubidium Standard Timebase, 3-39

RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-17

RX Acceptance Tests, Frame Error Rate, 4-5, 4-12

RX path, 1-3

Sector Configuration, 1-25

Set Antenna Map Data, 3-76

Set Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-4

Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-57

Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-58

SGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-4

Shelf Configuration Switch, 2-3

Signal Generator, 3-54, 3-55

Site, equipage verification, 3-3

Site checklist, data sheets, A-2

Site Documents, required, 1-11

Site equipage, CDF file, 3-2

Site I/O board

E1 span isolation, illustration, 3-4

T1 span cable connection, 5-8

T1 span isolation, illustration, 3-4

Span Line

connector , 6-13

T1/E1 Verification Equipment, 1-10

Span Parameter Configuration

set, procedure, 5-4

verification, procedure, 5-3

Span Problems no control link, Troubleshooting, 6-27

SPANS LED, GLI, 6-23

Spectral Purity Transmit Mask ATP, 4-6

Spectrum Analyzer, 1-10, 3-54, 3-55

Spectrum Analyzer , HP8594E, 3-39

STATUS LED, GLI, 6-23

SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22

System Connectivity Test, HP8921A, F-2

isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-4

span connection, 5-8

Test data sheets

AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, A-17

BTS redundancy/alarm tests, A-16

general optimization checklist, A-4

GPS receiver operation, A-5

initial power tests, A-3

LFR receiver operation, A-6

LPA

convergence, A-8

IM Reduction, A-7

pre–power tests, A-3

preliminary operations, A-2

RX antenna VSWR, A-17

site checklist, A-2

TX antenna VSWR, A-16

TX BLO

Offset/Power Output Verification, A-9

Power Output Verification, A-14

Test Equipment

Automatically Selecting, 3-51

Calibrating, 3-52

Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-39

Manually Selecting, 3-50

Reference Chart, 3-40

Selecting, 3-50

verification data sheets, A-1

VSWR, G-1

Test Equipment Setup, 3-39

GPS, 3-30

HP PCS Interface, F-7

LFR/HSO, 3-30

RF path calibration, 3-63

Test Matrix, C-4

ATP optimization, C-2

Test Set, Calibration, 3-49

Timing Reference Cables, 1-8

Top Interconnect Plate, 1-13

Troubleshooting, 6-1, 6-17

BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line

Traffic, 6-16

BLO Calibration Failure, 6-6

C–CCP Backplane, 6-13, 6-14

Calibration Audit Failure, 6-7

Index – continued

May 2000 SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Index-7

Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement

Failure, 6-9

Code Download Failure, 6-4

Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,

6-3

CSM Checklist, 6-11

Data Download Failure, 6-4

DC Power Problems, 6-18

Device Enable (INS) Failure, 6-5

MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR,

6-16

MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over

Co–located GLI2, 6-15

Miscellaneous Failures, 6-5

Multi–FER Failure, 6-10

No BBX2 Control in the Shelf – No Control over

Co–located GLI2s, 6-16

No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module,

6-19

No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module,

6-18

No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection,

6-15

No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-15

Power Meter Communication Failure, 6-2

Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure,

6-8

Span Problems no control link, 6-27

TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-19

TX Mask Measurement Failure, 6-8

TSU NAM

Parameters, 3-74

Program, 3-79

TX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-16

TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-59

TX and RX Frequency vs Channel

1700 MHz, E-7

1900 MHz, E-2

800 MHz, E-4

TX and RX Signal Routing, C–CCP Backplane

Troubleshooting, 6-19

TX Audit Test, 3-67

TX BLO, test data sheets

Offset/Power Output Verification, A-9

Power Output Verification, A-14

TX Coupler, Setting Loss Value, 3-58

TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display,

illustration, 4-7

TX OUT connection, 4-2

TX Output Acceptance Tests

Code domain power, 4-5, 4-10

introduction, 4-5

Pilot Time Offset, 4-5, 4-9

Spectral purity TX mask, 4-5, 4-6

Waveform quality (rho), 4-5, 4-8

TX path, 1-3

audit, 3-67

calibration, 3-64

TX Path Calibration, 3-60

txmask test, 4-6

Unshielded Twisted Pair. See UTP

Updating LMF Files, 5-6

UTP

cable (RJ11 connectors), 3-5

LMF to BTS connection, 3-5

Verification of Test Equipment, data sheets, A-1

Verify Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-3

Virtual BTS, 3-6

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. See VSWR

VSWR

Advantest Test Set, G-4

Calculation, G-3, G-5

Equation, G-3, G-5

manual test setup detail

Advantest illustration, G-6

HP illustration, G-3, G-4

required test equipment, G-1

transmit and receive antenna, G-1

Walsh channels, 4-10

Warm–up, 1-5

Waveform Quality (rho) ATP, 4-8

When to optimize

Ancillary – table, C-1

Index – continued

SC 4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP May 2000Index-8

BTS, C-1

inter–frame cabling, C-2

Xircom Model PE3–10B2, LMF to BTS connection,

3-5

Nokia Solutions and Networks T5AW1 48V 800MHz CDMA BTS User Manual cover in frontmat

Nokia Solutions and Networks 48V 800MHz CDMA BTS cover in frontmat

Exhibit D users manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation